Home
        Kenmore 385.11607 Sewing Machine User Manual
         Contents
1.                                                               25  Changing batteries                                                    288  Electronic main key  Synchronizing remote control                                 290  Electronic stability program  ESP   Control switch                                                            222  Malfunction and warning messages                       245  Malfunction indicator lamp                                      231  Synchronizing                                                            221  Warning lamp                                                             231  Emergency call  See Tele Aid                                                                183  Emergency tensioning retractor  ETR                           66  Emergency trunk lid release button                        41  42  Emergency unlocking in case of accident                    36  Emission control                                                              181    Emission control label                                                    312  Engine compartment                                                      254  ENGINE FAN   malfunction and  warning messages                                                     239  Engine malfunction  CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp        228  Engine oil additives                                                        320  Engine oil consumption                                                  113  Engin
2.                                                            150  Supplemental restraint system  SRS                             65  Synchronizing remote control                                      290    T    Tachometer                                                                         87  Technical data                                                                   313  Electrical system                                                        316  Main dimensions                                                       317  Rims and tires                                                            314  Weights                                                                        317  Tele Aid                                                                             182  Emergency calls                                                         183  Information                                                                 187  Initiating an emergency call manually                   185  Roadside Assistance                                                  186    J_A208 book Seite 335 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    336  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    TELE AID   malfunction  and warning messages                                             247  Telephone                                                                           96  General notes                     
3.                                                          127  Anti theft system                                                        129  Button and soft key operation                                  130  Cassette mode                                                             135  CD changer                                                                  140  CD mode                                                                      139  Operating and display elements                              128  Operating safety                                                         127  Operation                                                                     131  Operation     audio and telephone                            127  Radio mode                                                                 133  Telephone operation                                                  143  Audio systems                                                                    93  Cassette player                                                             95  CD player                                                                       94  Radio                                                                              93  Automatic central locking                                               36  Automatic climate control                                             120  Air distribution                                                           124  Air recirculation                    
4.                                                         229  Brakes                                                     204  206  216  220  Bulbs  See Replacing bulbs                                                   280    C    Capacities  Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc                                 318  Cargo tie down rings                                                      156  Catalytic converter                                                          180    J_A208 book Seite 327 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    328  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    CD changer  See Audio system                                                       140  Cellular telephone                                                          157  Center console                                                                   20  Central locking switch                                                     35  Central locking system                                                    27  Automatic central locking                                          36  Choosing global or selective mode                            30  Electronic key                                                               25  Locking and unlocking                                               29  Mechanical keys                                                           32  Remote control                                  
5.                                                        322  Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity                          322  Cruise control                                                                  214  Cup holder  Center console  front                                                 153    D    Daytime running lamps                                                  115  Deep water  Driving instructions                                                  213  DISPLAY DEFECTIVE  engine control unit     malfunction and warning messages                       235  DISPLAY DEFECTIVE  several systems     malfunction and warning messages                       235  Display illumination                                                         85  Doors                                                                                   33    J_A208 book Seite 328 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    329  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Drinking and driving                                                     205  Drive sensibly   save fuel                                               205  Driving instructions                                                       205  Driving off                                                                        207    E    ELEC  STABIL  PROG    malfunction  and warning messages                                             245  Electronic key      
6.                                                    88  Engine oil level indicator                                            92  FSS  Flexible service system                                     92  Setting the audio volume                                          108  Trip and main odometer                                             92  Vehicle speed                                                                92  Multifunction steering wheel                                         88    N    Navigation system   Multifunction display                  101  Night security illumination                                           115    O    On board diagnostic system                                          228  Operator   s Manual                                                               8  Outside temperature indicator                                       86  Overhead control panel                                                     21    P    Panic button                                                                       32  Parcel net in front passenger footwell                         156  Parking                                                                             208  Parking brake                      154  194  204  208  229  266  PARKING BRAKE   malfunction and warning messages  239  Power assistance                                                             206  Power seats  front                                                              45  Backres
7.                                          157  Incoming call                                                              100  Redialing                                                                       98  Telephone book                                                            96  Telephones and two way radios                                    178  Telescoping steering column  Adjusting                                                                       77  Indicator lamp                                                            232  Telescoping steering column    malfunction and warning messages                       243  The first 1 000 miles                                                      179  Tire inflation pressure                                                    271  Tire speed rating                                                              210  Tire traction                                                                      210  Tires                                                                                  324  Driving instructions                                                  208  Rims and tires                                                             314  Rotating wheels                                                          263  Tire inflation pressure                                               271  Tire replacement                                                        262  Winter driving instructions                       
8.                                      125  Air volume                                                                   124  Basic setting                                                                122  Defogging windows                                                    123    J_A208 book Seite 326 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    327  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Defrosting                                                                    123  Display and controls                                                  122  Dust filter                                                                    126  Economy                                                                      123  Rear window defroster                                              124  Residual engine heat utilization  REST                 125  Special settings                                                          123  Automatic transmission                                                195  Emergency operation                                                203  Fluid level                                                                    257  Program mode selector switch                                202  Selector lever position                                               198  Transmission selector lever   manually unlocking                                              279    B    BabyS
9.                                      244  LIGHT SENSOR                                                           243  LIGHTING SYSTEM                                                    242  PARKING BRAKE                                                       239  REMOVE KEY                                                             245  STEER  WHEEL ADJUST                                            243  TELE AID                                                                     247  WASHER FLUID                                                          246  Malfunction warning message memory                     104  Manual operation of soft top                                         291  Mechanical keys                                                         25  32  Memory  Recalling                                                                 49  80  Storing                                                                            48  Mirror  exterior  adjusting                                               79    J_A208 book Seite 332 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    333  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Mirror  exterior  rear view                                               79  Mirror  inside  rear view                                                  78  Multicontour seat                                                             55  Multifunction display    
10.                                114  Exterior lamps                                                                 280  Adjusting headlamp aim                                           285  Fog lamps                                                                     114  Headlamps                       114  242  243  281  285  305  Low and high beam                                            117  282  Parking lamps                                                    114  282  Replacing bulbs                                                          280  Side marker lamp  front                                            284  Standing lamps                                                   114  282  Taillamp assemblies                                                  283  Turn signal lamp                                                 117  282    F    First aid kit                                                                      250  Flat tire  See changing wheels                                                 266  Flexible service system  FSS                                        109  Fuel  Gasoline additives                                                     322  Premium unleaded gasoline                    180  319  321    Fuel cap placement warning                                         230  Fuel filler flap  Manual release                                                           299  Fuel requirements                                                          321  F
11.                            27  Changing wheels                                                            266  CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp             228  Check regularly and before a long trip                       226  Checking engine oil level  Via engine oil level indicator                                    112  Via oil dipstick                                                            256  Child restraint                                               58  63  64  75  Child seat  See Infant and child restraint systems                     75  Cleaning and care of the vehicle                                  302  Clock  setting                                                                   106  COMAND  radio and telephone                                    178  Combination switch                                                        117  Consumer information                                                   324    Control and operation of radio transmitters               178  COOLANT  coolant level    malfunction  and warning messages                                              240  Coolant level  Adding coolant                                                            258  Checking                                                                      257  COOLANT TEMP   coolant temperature     malfunction and warning messages                       241  Coolant temperature gauge                                             86  Coolants                     
12.                           55  Heated seats                                       56  Seat belts and integrated  restraint system                            58    Seat belts                                            58  Seat belt nonusage  warning system                             59  BabySmartTM airbag  deactivation system                     64  Self test BabySmartTM without  special child seat installed          65  Supplemental restraint  system  SRS                                  65  Emergency tensioning  retractor  ETR                               66  Airbags                                               67  Safety guidelines for the  seat belt  emergency tensioning  retractor and airbag                      73  Infant and child  restraint systems                           75  Adjusting telescoping  steering column                           77  Inside rear view mirror                   78  Antiglare night position               78  Exterior rear view mirrors              79  Instrument cluster                            82  Indicator lamps in the  instrument cluster                       84    J_A208 book Seite 1 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    2  Contents    Multifunction steering wheel   multifunction display                  88  Trip and main odometer  and sub menu                               92  Audio systems                                   93  Radio                                               93  CD player                                        94  Ca
13.                          117    V    Vanity mirrors                                                                 150  Vehicle jack                                                                      261  Vehicle tools                                                                     260    J_A208 book Seite 336 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    337  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    W    Warning lamps  See Indicator lamps in the  instrument cluster                                                  84  Warning message memory                                            104  Warranty coverage                                                           310  WASHER FLUID  headlamp cleaning system     malfunction and warning messages                       246  Washing the vehicle                                                       304  What you should know at the gas station                   224  Wheels                                                                              262  Light alloy wheels                                                      305  Rims and tires                                                             314  Wheels  changing                                                      266    Where to find it                                                                 13  Wind screen                                                                  
14.                         231  Telescoping steering column      indicator lamp                              232  Seat belt warning lamp              232    Malfunction and  indicator lamps in the  center console                            232  AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp     232  Roll bar warning lamp               233  Malfunction and  warning messages in the  multifunction display               234  DISPLAY DEFECTIVE   engine control unit                   235  DISPLAY DEFECTIVE   several systems                         235  BATTERY ALTERNATOR           236  ABS SYSTEM                               237  BRAKE ASSIST                            237  BRAKE LINING WEAR               238  BRAKE FLUID                             238  PARKING BRAKE                        239  ENGINE FAN                                239  COOLANT  coolant level           240  COOLANT TEMP    coolant temperature                  241    LIGHTING SYSTEM                     242  LIGHT SENSOR                            243  STEER  WHEEL ADJUST             243  ENGINE OIL LEVEL                    244  ELEC  STABIL  PROG    Electronic stability  program                                        245  REMOVE KEY                              245  WASHER FLUID                          246  TELE AID                                      247    J_A208 book Seite 227 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    228  Malfunction and indicator lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cl
15.                      146  Interior lighting                               149  Sun visors                                         150  Illuminated vanity mirrors            150  Interior                                              151  Storage compartments  armrest  and cup holder                            151  Glove box                                       151    Ashtray                                             154  Lighter                                              155  Cargo tie down rings                      156  Parcel net in front  passenger footwell                     156  Armrest  rear bench                       156  Telephone  general                         157  Cellular telephone                          157  Garage door opener                        158  Soft top                                             162  Wind screen                                     170    Driving    Control and operation of  radio transmitters                      178  The first 1 000 miles   1 500 km                                   179  Maintenance                                    179  Catalytic converter                         180  Emission control                              181  Tele Aid                                            182  Steering lock                                    192  Starting and turning off  the engine                                   194    J_A208 book Seite 2 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    3  Contents    Automatic transmission           
16.                      306  Upholstery                                    307  Hard plastic trim items              307  Plastic and rubber parts             307  Wind screen                                307  Rubber weatherstrip                  307  Soft top                                          308    Technical data    Spare parts service                         310  Warranty coverage                          310  Identification labels                        311  Layout of poly V belt drive             312  Technical data                                  313  Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc       capacities                                     318  Engine oils                                       320  Engine oil additives                       320  Air conditioner  refrigerant                                  320  Brake fluid                                       320    Premium unleaded  gasoline                                       321  Fuel requirements                          321  Gasoline additives                          322  Coolants                                            322  Consumer information                   324    Index    Index                                                 326    J_A208 book Seite 5 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    J_A208 book Seite 6 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    7  Introduction    Product information    Kindly observe the following in your own best interest     We recommend using Mercedes Benz original parts as well as 
17.                     33  Central locking switch                     35  Automatic central locking           36  Emergency unlocking in  case of accident                            36  Trunk                                                  37  Trunk lamp                                        39  Trunk lid release switch                  40  Trunk lid emergency release           41  Trunk lid emergency release          42    Antitheft alarm system                     43  Tow away alarm                                 44  Power seats  front                              45  Front head restraints                    51  Roll bar and head  restraints  rear                              52  Backrest                                              54  Multicontour seat                              55  Heated seats                                       56  Seat belts and integrated  restraint system                            58  Seat belts                                            58  Seat belt nonusage  warning system                              59  BabySmartTM airbag  deactivation system                     64  Self test BabySmartTM without  special child seat installed           65  Supplemental restraint  system  SRS                                  65  Emergency tensioning  retractor  ETR                               66    Airbags                                               67  Safety guidelines for the  seat belt  emergency tensioning  retractor and airbag                      
18.                211  Tool kit  See Vehicle tools                                                        260    Tow away alarm                                                                 44  Towing the vehicle                                                          276  Transmission                                                                   195  Transmission selector lever   manually unlocking                                                   279  Traveling abroad                                                             213  Trip and main odometer and sub menu                        92  Trip computer                                                                  102  Trip odometer                                                                    87  Trunk                                                                                  37  Opening                                                                         30  Release switch                                                              40  Separately locked                                                         37  Trunk lamp                                                                        39  Trunk lid  Emergency release                                                 41  42  Release switch                                                              40  Turn signal failure                                                           117  Turn signals                                             
19.              164  Raising                                                                         166  SOS call  See Tele Aid                                                                182  Spare parts service                                                          310  Spare wheel                                                            260  264  Special settings  Automatic climate control              123  SRS indicator lamp                                                         230  SRS malfunction                                                               68  Start lock out                                                                     26  Starting and turning off the engine                             194  STEER  WHEEL ADJUST    malfunction  and warning messages                                             243  Steering column  adjustable                                            77  Steering lock                                                                    192  Storage compartment  Trunk floor                                                                  260    Storage compartments  Center console                                                            152  Glove box                                                                     151  Storage compartments  armrest  and cup holder                                                            151  Stowing things in the vehicle                                       250  Sun visors              
20.           156  Armrest  rear bench                       156  Telephone  general                         157  Cellular telephone                          157  Garage door opener                        158  Soft top                                             162  Wind screen                                     170    J_A208 book Seite 23 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    24  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Vehicle keys    Included with your vehicle are 2 electronic keys with  integrated radio frequency and infrared remote controls  plus removable mechanical key     The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the  two electronic keys are a different color to help  distinguish it     Warning     When leaving the vehicle always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  and lock your  vehicle  Do not leave children unattended in the  vehicle  or with access to an unlocked vehicle   Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause  serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 24 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    25  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Electronic key    The electronic key has an integrated radio frequency  and infrared remote control  plus removable mechanical  key     The remote control  1  operates all loc
21.          The roll bar lowers  when in the upper position          The soft top compartment cover and rear  window section of the soft top unlocks         The rear window section of the soft top raises         The soft top compartment cover opens         The soft top lowers into its storage compartment         The soft top compartment cover closes and  locks         The indicator lamp in the soft top switch goes  out     the lowering procedure is completed     a  signal sounds     If the soft top switch is held or is released and lifted  again within approximately 2 seconds  the side  windows will close  If the roll bar was previously in the  upper position  it will return to that position     The side windows can also be opened closed later on   Lift press soft top switch twice and hold  see page 148     However  the side windows and the roll bar can also be  activated using their respective switches  see page 146  and page 53     J_A208 book Seite 165 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    166  Soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Note     For safety reasons  the soft top cannot be lowered while  driving     Raising Soft Top    1  Engage parking brake     2  Close luggage cover and trunk lid     For notes on the luggage cover  see page 250     3  Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2     4  Press symbol side of soft top switch and hold         The indicator lamp 
22.       116  Headlights                                                                         114  Heated seats                                                                      56  High beams  See Combination switch                                            117  Hood                                                                                  254    I    Identification labels                                                         311  Illuminated vanity mirrors                                            150  Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster                    84  Individual settings                                                          106  Infant and child restraint systems                                 75  Information call  See Tele Aid                                                                187  Instrument cluster                                                            82  Activating display                                                        85    Indicator lamps                                                             84  Instrument lamps                                                              85  Instruments and controls                                                18  Interior  General notes                                                              151  Interior lighting                                                               149    J    Jump starting                                                                
23.       242  Limp home mode  Automatic transmission               203  Locking and unlocking                                                    29  Low beams  See Exterior lamps                                                     280  Low engine coolant level warning                               240  Luggage cover                                                                  250    M    Maintenance                                                                    179  Malfunction and indicator lamps  in the instrument cluster                                          228  Malfunction and warning messages                            234  ABS SYSTEM                                                              237  BATTERY ALTERNATOR                                           236    BRAKE ASSIST                                                           237  BRAKE FLUID                                                             238  BRAKE LINING WEAR                                              238  COOLANT  coolant level                                           240  COOLANT TEMP   coolant temperature                 241  DISPLAY DEFECTIVE   engine control unit                                              235  DISPLAY DEFECTIVE   several systems                                                    235  ELEC  STABIL  PROG                                                 245  ENGINE FAN                                                               239  ENGINE OIL LEVEL              
24.      10    N82 10 2396 26    J_A208 book Seite 286 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    287  Exterior lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    5  Vertical headlamp aim  low beams on      Turn adjusting screw  1   counterclockwise to adjust  headlamp downward  clockwise upward  until the  headlamps illuminate the test screen as shown  The  vertex of the angle formed in each beam image  should align with the vertical and horizontal  centerlines  8 and 9      The left and right headlamps must be adjusted  individually     Note     If it is not possible to obtain a proper headlamp  adjustment  have the system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center     J_A208 book Seite 287 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    288  Electronic key    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Changing batteries in the electronic key    1 Transmit buttons    2 Lamp for battery check and function control    Checking batteries    If one of the transmit buttons  1  is pressed  the battery  check lamp  2  lights up briefly     indicating that the  batteries are in order     Change batteries if the battery check lamp  2  does not  light up briefly     Changing batteries    Move locking tab  3  in direction of right arrow and  remove mechanical key  4  left arrow      P80 20 2201 26    1    2    P80 35 2029 26    4   
25.      195  Parking brake                                  204  Driving instructions                       205  Drive sensibly      save fuel                                        205  Drinking and driving                  205  Pedals                                            205  Power assistance                         206  Brakes                                           206  Driving off                                    207  Parking                                         208  Tires                                              208  Snow chains                                  211  Winter driving  instructions                                   211  Deep water                                    213  Passenger compartment             213  Traveling abroad                          213  Cruise control                                   214  Brake assist system   BAS                                              216  Antilock brake system   ABS                                              218    Electronic stability program   ESP                                             220  What you should know  at the gas station                       224  Check regularly and  before a long trip                       226    Instrument cluster display    Malfunction and  indicator lamps in the  instrument cluster                     228  On board diagnostic system  Check engine malfunction  indicator lamp                             228  Brake warning lamp                   229  Supplemental
26.      For rim and tire specifications  refer to    Technical Data      page 314      Spare wheel CLK 320  with Sport Package    CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG    Important     The spare wheel rim size is 71 2 J x 17 H 2     The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full size tire of  the same type as on the vehicle   s front axle  CLK 320  with Sport Package  the tire size is 205 55 R 16 91 H    and is fully functional  However  the spare wheel rim is  weight optimized and has a limited service life of  12 000 miles  20 000 km  use before a standard wheel  rim must replace it     Warning     The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only  Use  for over a total of 12 000 miles  20 000 km    aggregate of all uses  may cause wheel rim failure  leading to an accident and possible injuries     J_A208 book Seite 264 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    265  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    If the arrow on tire side wall does not point in direction  of vehicle forward movement when using the spare  wheel  observe the following restriction         Drive to the nearest tire repair facility as soon as  possible     In the case of a rear axle flat tire  CLK 320 with Sport  Package  In case of a flat tire   you may temporarily use  the spare wheel  when observing the following  restrictions         Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph  80 km h         Drive to the nearest tire repair facility 
27.      Readjust the mirror as desired     One passenger side mirror position can be stored in  memory  To do so     1  Turn electronic key to steering lock position 2     The vehicle must be stationary     2  Select passenger side mirror  amp  and adjust the  mirror to view the curb     3  Press green memory button located in switch cluster  for driver seat  see page 48     4  Within 3 seconds pull the mirror toggle switch  rearward  The mirror should not move     Repeat the memory procedure if the mirror moves     The passenger side mirror will return to its previous  position after approx  20 seconds     J_A208 book Seite 81 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    82  Instrument cluster    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Instrument cluster    J_A208 book Seite 82 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    83  Instrument cluster    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    1 Push buttons V and W for intensity of instrument  lamps  see page 85    2 Push button J for resetting trip odometer  see  page 87  or to acknowledge a malfunction or  warning message  see page 104     3 Coolant temperature gauge  see page 86    4 Fuel gauge with reserve and fuel cap placement  warning lamp  see page 230    5 Outside temperature indicator  see page 86    6 Left turn signal indicator lamp  see combination  switch on page 
28.      Simultaneously press both f and g buttons for  temperature setting of 72  F   Q    Air volume and distribution are controlled  automatically     This setting can be used all year around     0  MAX    J_A208 book Seite 122 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    123  Automatic climate control    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Economy    The function of this setting corresponds to the  automatic mode  However  because the air conditioning  compressor will not engage  fuel savings   it is not  possible to air condition in this setting     Press S button to activate     Press S button once again to return to previous  setting     Special settings  use only for short duration     Defogging windows    Switch off O button     Press left and right U buttons     Press button b repeatedly until air is directed  upward   U    Turn wheels  2  to position i to open left and right  side air outlets  4   Adjust side air outlets upward     Defrosting    Turn wheels  2  to position i to open left and right  side air outlets  4   Adjust side air outlets upward     Press P button  Maximum heated and automatically  controlled amount of air is directed to the windshield  and side windows   P    Press P button once again to return to previous  setting     J_A208 book Seite 123 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    124  Automatic climate control    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  
29.    109  Engine oil level indicator                112  Engine oil consumption                  113  Exterior lamp switch                       114  Night security illumination           115  Headlamp cleaning system            116  Combination switch                        117  Hazard warning flasher  switch                                            119    Automatic climate control              120  Display and controls                   122  Basic setting                                 122  Economy                                        123  Special settings                            123  Rear window defroster                124  Air recirculation                          125  Residual engine heat  utilization                                      125  Dust filter                                      126  Audio and telephone   operation                                      127  Power windows                                146  Interior lighting                               149  Sun visors                                         150  Illuminated vanity mirrors            150  Interior                                              151  Storage compartments  armrest  and cup holder                            151  Glove box                                       151    Ashtray                                             154  Lighter                                              155  Cargo tie down rings                      156  Parcel net in front  passenger footwell           
30.    170  Windows  See Power windows                                                    146  Windshield washer headlamp cleaning system  Refilling                                                                       259  Winter driving                                                                 212  Winter driving instructions                                            211  Wiper blade  Replacing insert                                                         299  Wiper operation  See Combination switch                                            118    J_A208 book Seite 337 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    J_A208 book Seite 338 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    J_A208 book Seite 339 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    J_A208 book Seite 340 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    Service and Literature    Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes Benz parts to service your  vehicle properly  For expert advice and quality service  see your authorized Mercedes Benz Center     If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle  please contact your authorized Mercedes Benz  Center  We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle     For further information you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com     We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this  Operator   s Manual  Reprinting  translation an
31.    274    K    Keys  changing battery                                                   288  Keys  vehicle                                                                      24    L    Lamps  exterior  Fog lamps                                                                     114  Headlamp  adjusting                                                  285  Headlamps                        114  242  243  281  285  305  Low and high beam                                            117  282  Parking lamps                                                     114  282    J_A208 book Seite 331 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    332  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Replacing bulbs                                                          280  Side marker lamp  front                                            284  Standing lamps                                                   114  282  Taillamp assemblies                                          114  283  Turn signal lamps                                               117  282  Layout of poly V belt drive                                              312  LIGHT SENSOR   malfunction  and warning messages                                             243  Lighter                                                                              155  LIGHTING SYSTEM   malfunction  and warning messages                                       
32.    If the indicator lamp in the    SOS    button does not  illuminate during or remains illuminated after the  system self check or if the message    TELE AID      VISIT WORKSHOP    appears in the multifunction  display  have the system checked at the nearest  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     J_A208 book Seite 191 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    192  Steering lock    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Steering lock    0 The electronic key can be withdrawn in this position  only  The steering is locked when the electronic key  is removed from the steering lock  If necessary   move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking  mechanism to engage  The electronic key can only  be removed with the selector lever in position    P      After removing the electronic key or with the  electronic key in steering lock position 0  the  selector lever is locked in position    P        1 Steering is unlocked      If necessary  move steering wheel slightly to allow  the electronic key to be turned clockwise to  position 1   Most electrical consumers can be  operated  For detailed information see respective  subjects     2 Driving position     Gear selector lever is unlocked   To move the selector lever out of position    P     firmly  depress the service brake pedal     3 Starting position     See page 194 for starting and turning off the engine   P82 00 2073 26    Warning     When 
33.    Warning     All messages contain important information which  should be taken note of and  where malfunction  indicated  addressed as soon as possible at an  authorized Mercedes Benz Center     Failure to repair condition noted may cause  damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited  Warranty  or result in property damage or personal  injury     J_A208 book Seite 234 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    235  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    DISPLAY DEFECTIVE  engine control unit     This message is displayed to indicate that the  information being relayed by the engine control unit is  no longer complete  The coolant temperature gauge   tachometer  or the cruise control may have failed     DISPLAY DEFECTIVE  several systems     The displays for several systems have failed  Some  systems themselves may also have failed     Line 1  Line 2    DISPLAY DEFECTIVE  VISIT WORKSHOP     Line 1  Line 2    DISPLAY DEFECTIVE  VISIT WORKSHOP     J_A208 book Seite 235 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    236  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    BATTERY ALTERNATOR  This message indicates a malfunction which must be  repaired immediately     It may indicate that the poly V belt has broken  Should  this condition occur  the poly V be
34.   1    4    2    3    J_A208 book Seite 214 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    215  Driving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    3 Canceling    To cancel the cruise control  briefly push lever to  position 3     When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle  speed drops below approx  25 mph  40 km h   for  example when driving upgrade  the cruise control  will be canceled     If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains  inoperative until the engine is restarted  have the  system checked at your authorized Mercedes Benz  Center as soon as possible     4 Resume    If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when  driving at a speed exceeding approx  25 mph   40 km h   the vehicle resumes the speed which  was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise  control  The last memorized speed is canceled when  the electronic key in the steering lock is turned to  position 1 or 0     Important     Moving gear selector lever to position    N    switches the  cruise control off     Warning     Only use the cruise control if the traffic and  weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a  steady speed         The use of cruise control can be dangerous on  winding roads or in heavy traffic because  conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady  speed         The use of cruise control can be dangerous on  slippery roads  Rapid changes in tire adhesion  can result in whe
35.   169  Soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    If the indicator lamp in the soft top switch blinks slowly  while activating the switch         the battery voltage may be insufficient     start  engine and let it run while activating switch         the system may be overheated  for example after  lowering or raising the soft top approx  5  consecutive times      after approx  10 minutes the  soft top switch may be activated again     If indicator lamp in the soft top switch blinks rapidly  while activating the switch         the trunk lid and or the luggage cover may be open   and need to be closed         the soft top is still locked during the opening  procedure and needs to be unlocked         the opening closing procedure is interrupted     In this case the soft top needs to be synchronized   Turn electronic key in steering lock back to  position 0  and then to position 2  Activate soft top  switch again  The soft top should now be operational  again     If the indicator lamp continues to blink  raise the soft  top manually  see page 291     Have the system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     Notes     If the roll bar was raised automatically  the process of  raising or lowering the soft top will take somewhat  longer  as the roll bar must first be lowered     Whenever possible  park vehicle in the shade as  continuous exposure to sun ra
36.   31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    152  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Storage compartments in center console  To open compartment in armrest   Press button  4  and lift lid     To open compartment under armrest   Press button  5  and lift lid     To close   Lower lid until it engages in lock     To open cover   Touch top of cover  6  slightly  The cover opens  automatically     J_A208 book Seite 152 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    153  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Cup holder in center console    To open cup holder   Briefly press button  7   The cup holder opens  automatically     To store cup holder   Push button  7  down until cup holder engages  Close  cover  6      Notes     The right claw is adjustable to accommodate most  container sizes     An additional second  smaller size  container can be  placed in the cup holder     Spilling liquids  e g  soda or coffee  could restrict the  movement of the claw  Refer to page 306 for cleaning  the cup holder     Caution     Keep cup holder closed while traveling  Place only  containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills     Do not fill containers to a height where the contents  could spill during vehicle maneuvers  especially hot  liquids     J_A208 book Seite 153 Donnerstag  31  Mai 
37.   Car care  Index    Operating and display elements    1 On off  volume  see page 131    2 Telephone mode selector  see page 143    3 Seek  see page 133  137 and 141    4 Radio mode selector  see page 133    5 Tune  see page 133 and 134  Fast forward reverse  see page 137    6 CD mode selector  see page 140    7 Display panel  The cassette slot is located behind the display panel   For notes on playing cassettes  see page 135     8 Alpha numeric keypad for  station storage and frequency entry  see page 134  CD Track access  see page 142  optional telephone  see page 143    9 Function button  see page 134 and 142    J_A208 book Seite 128 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    129  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    10 Soft keys for  radio band selection  see page 133  tone controls  see page 131  scan  see page 134  Tape eject  see page 136  Tape track select  see page 136  Dolby  see page 138  CD Random repeat  see page 142    11 Tape mode selector  see page 135    Anti theft system    If the power supply to the  radio has been interrupted      CODE    will appear on the  display when it is next  switched on  The radio will  only work after the five digit code has been entered  using the buttons on the right hand control panel     The code number is shown on the Radio code card   supplied with the radio     Important     Never leave the Radio code card in the vehicle  Ke
38.   ENGINE OIL LEVEL  REDUCE OIL LEVEL 3    ENGINE OIL LEVEL  VISIT WORKSHOP 4    ENGINE OIL SENSOR  VISIT WORKSHOP 5    ENGINE OIL  VISIT WORKSHOP 6    J_A208 book Seite 244 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    245  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    ELEC  STABIL  PROG    Electronic stability program     1  A malfunction has been detected in the system  Pressing the  accelerator pedal will require greater effort  Only partial engine  output will be available     2  This message may be displayed if the power supply was  interrupted  battery disconnected or empty      3  Synchronize ESP  See page 221    REMOVE KEY    This message plus an audible alarm indicate that the  electronic key is in steering lock position 0 or 1  and the  driver   s door is open     Line 1  Line 2    DISPLAY DEFECTIVE  VISIT WORKSHOP     ELEC  STABIL  PROG   VISIT WORKSHOP 1  2  3    Line 1  Line 2    REMOVE KEY     P54 30 3573 21    J_A208 book Seite 245 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    246  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    WASHER FLUID  When this message appears while the engine is  running  the level of the reservoir has dropped to  approx  1 3 of the total volume  The reservoir should be  refilled with the prescribed mixture of MB Windshield
39.   Mai 2001 9 35 09    306  Cleaning and care of the vehicle    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Instrument cluster    Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent  for delicate fabrics as a washing solution  Wipe with a  cloth moistened in lukewarm solution  Do not use  scouring agents     Steering wheel and gear selector lever    Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean  with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care     Cup holder    Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent  for delicate fabrics as a washing solution  Wipe with a  cloth moistened in lukewarm solution  Do not use  scouring agents     Seat belts    The webbing must not be treated with chemical  cleaning agents  Use only clear  lukewarm water and  soap  Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above  176  F  80  C  or in direct sunlight     Headliner    Clean with soft bristle brush  or use a dry shampoo  cleaner in case of excessive dirt     Warning     Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely  weaken them  In a crash they may not be able to  provide adequate protection     J_A208 book Seite 306 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    307  Cleaning and care of the vehicle    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Upholstery    Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that  have the tenden
40.   P        3  Turn off the engine     4  Wait approx  10 seconds     5  Restart the engine     6  Move selector lever to position    D     for 2nd gear   or  move selector lever to position    R     for reverse gear      Have the transmission checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     J_A208 book Seite 203 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    204  Parking brake    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Parking brake  To engage  firmly depress parking brake pedal  When  the electronic key is in steering lock position 2  the  brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster should  come on brightly     To release the parking brake  pull handle on instrument  panel  The brake warning lamp in the instrument  cluster should go out     A warning sounds  if you start to drive without having  released the parking brake     Also see brake warning lamp on page 229     Warning     When leaving the vehicle always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  and lock the  vehicle  Do not leave children unattended in the  vehicle  or with access to an unlocked vehicle   Children could release the parking brake  which  could result in an accident or serious injury     J_A208 book Seite 204 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    205  Driving instructions    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  
41.   Washer Concentrate    S    and water or the Concentrate  and commercially available premixed windshield  washer solvent antifreeze  depending on ambient  temperature  at the next opportunity  The reservoir for  the windshield and headlamp washer systems is located  in the engine compartment     See windshield washer system on page 259 for  instructions on adding washer fluid   Line 1  Line 2    WASHER FLUID  CHECK LEVEL     J_A208 book Seite 246 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    247  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    TELE AID    1  When this message appears  a malfunction has been detected in  the Tele Aid system  In some cases it may not be possible to initiate  an Emergency  Roadside Assistance or Information call     See page 182 for notes on the Tele Aid     If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above  have the  system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as  soon as possible     Line 1  Line 2    TELE AID  VISIT WORKSHOP 1    J_A208 book Seite 247 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    J_A208 book Seite 248 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    249  Contents     Practical hints    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Practical hints    First aid kit                                      250  Shelf below rear window               250  Stowing t
42.   installed  Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will  advise you on this subject     Note     Too many unsuccessful starting attempts may discharge  the battery     Turning off    Turn the electronic key in the steering lock to position 0  to stop the engine     The electronic key can only be removed with the  selector lever in position    P        J_A208 book Seite 194 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    195  Automatic transmission    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Automatic transmission  The automatic transmission selects individual gears  automatically  dependent upon        Selector lever position        Program mode selector        Accelerator position        Vehicle speed    The gear shifting process is continuously adapted   dependent on the driving style  the driving situation  and the road characteristics     Important     When parking the vehicle or before working on the  vehicle with the engine running  firmly depress the  parking brake pedal and shift the selector lever into    P        J_A208 book Seite 195 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    196  Automatic transmission    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Driving    The selector lever is automatically locked while in  position    P     To move the selector lever out of  position    P     the service brake pedal must be f
43.  1    1    J_A208 book Seite 163 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    164  Soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Lowering Soft Top    1  Engage parking brake     2  Close luggage cover and trunk lid     For notes on the luggage cover  see page 250     3  Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2     4  Press lock button  1  and fold down locking  handle  2      5  Turn locking handle 90   clockwise to unlock the soft  top     Important     Push soft top frame approx  8 inches  20 cm  upward by  the locking handle  Failing to do so will result in  damage to the soft top folding mechanism that is not  covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     Turn locking handle counterclockwise to the stop and  fold up until it locks in place         The indicator lamp in the soft top switch lights up         The side windows lower     P77 30 2070 26    1    2    P77 30 2080 26    J_A208 book Seite 164 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    165  Soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    The switch is located on the center console     Notes     If indicator lamp blinks slowly  a malfunction has  occurred in the system     If indicator lamp blinks rapidly  the trunk lid and or the  luggage cover may be open  and need to be closed     6  Lift symbol side of the soft top switch and hold
44.  198 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    199  Automatic transmission    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Dependent on the program mode selector switch  position    S    or    W    the maximum speed in the  reverse gear is different  However  it is not  possible to change the program mode while in  reverse     Neutral    No power is transmitted from the engine to the  drive axle  When the brakes are released  the  vehicle can be moved freely  pushed or towed   Do  not engage    N    while driving except to coast  when the vehicle is in danger of skidding  e g  on  icy roads  see winter driving instructions on  page 211      Important     Coasting the vehicle  or driving for any other  reason with selector lever in    N    can result in  transmission damage that is not covered by the  Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     The transmission automatically upshifts through  5th gear  Position    D    provides optimum driving  characteristics under all normal operating  conditions     Gear selection for special circumstances    The transmission gear ranges for special circumstances  can be selected by pressing the selector lever to the  right or the left with the selector lever in position    D        The gear range currently selected is indicated in the  instrument cluster display     Briefly press selector lever in the    direction   The transmission downshifts  one gear at a time  in the 
45.  245 40 ZR 17 91 Y 3    Model  CLK 320    Rims  light alloy   Wheel offset  7 J x 16 H 2  1 46 in  37 mm     All season tires   Radial ply tires  205 55 R 16 91 H    Winter tires   Radial ply tires  205 55 R 16 91 H M S    Spare wheel    Rim  light alloy   Wheel offset   7 J x 16 H 2  1 46 in  37 mm     All season tire   Radial ply tire  205 55 R 16 91 H    Model  CLK 320    Rims front axle   AMG light alloy   Wheel offset  71 2 J x 17 H 2  1 46 in  37 mm     Rims rear axle   AMG light alloy   Wheel offset  81 2 J x 17 H 2  1 18 in  30 mm     Radial ply tires  Summer tires  front axle   Summer tires  rear axle   225 45 R 17 91 Y1  4    245 40 R 17 91 Y2  3  5    J_A208 book Seite 314 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    315  Technical data    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    1  Also permissible 225 45 ZR 17    2  Also permissible 245 40 ZR 173    3  Must not be used with snow chains     4  Also permissible 225 45 ZR 17 91 Y     5  Also permissible 245 40 ZR 17 91 Y 3    Model  CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG    Rims front axle   AMG light alloy   Wheel offset   71 2 J x 17 H 2  1 46 in  37 mm   71 2 J x 17 H 2  1 46 in  37 mm     Rims rear axle   AMG light alloy   Wheel offset   81 2 J x 17 H 2  1 18 in  30 mm   81 2 J x 17 H 2  1 34 in  34 mm     Radial ply tires   summer tires  front axle  summer tires  rear axle  225 45 R 17 91 W1    245 40 R 17 91 W2  3  5  225 45 R 17 91 Y1  4    245 40 
46.  299  Manual release for fuel filler flap    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Manual release for fuel filler flap    The manual release knob is located behind the right  side trunk panel     In case the central locking system does not release the  fuel filler flap  pull the manual release knob while  simultaneously opening the fuel filler flap     Replacing wiper blade insert    For safety reasons  remove electronic key from steering  lock before replacing the wiper blade  otherwise the  motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury     Notes     Do not open engine hood with wiper arm folded forward     Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the windshield  glass without a wiper blade inserted  The glass may be  scratched or broken     Make certain that the wiper blade is properly installed   An improperly installed wiper blade may cause  windshield damage   P80 20 2051 26    J_A208 book Seite 299 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    300  Replacing wiper blade insert    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Removal     Fold wiper arm forward  Press safety tab down  1   push  wiper blade downward  2  and remove     Place wiper blade on firm support  Press down both tabs  and slide  direction of arrow  the wiper blade insert out  of the retainer claws     Installation     Slide  direction of arrow 
47.  3    J_A208 book Seite 288 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    289  Electronic key    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Insert mechanical key  4  in side opening  5  to open  latch  Press briefly  do not use mechanical key as lever   to release battery compartment     Remove mechanical key from side opening     Carefully remove battery compartment in direction of  arrow  6      Change batteries  7   inserting new ones under contact  spring  8  with plus     side facing up     Return battery compartment into housing until locked  in place and slide mechanical key back into electronic  key     P80 35 2025 26    5    4    6    P80 35 2027 26    7    8    J_A208 book Seite 289 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    290  Electronic key    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Important     Batteries contain materials that can harm the  environment if disposed of improperly  Recycling of  batteries is the preferred method of disposal  For  disposal  please follow manufacturer   s recommendation  on battery package     Replacement Battery   Lithium  type CR 2025 or equivalent     Synchronizing remote control    The remote control may have to be resynchronized  if  the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked     To synchronize insert electronic key in steering lock     The remote control should once again 
48.  307  Wind screen                               307  Rubber weatherstrip                 307  Soft top                                         308    J_A208 book Seite 301 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    302  Cleaning and care of the vehicle    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Cleaning and care of the vehicle    In operation  your vehicle is subjected to varying  external influences which  if gone unchecked  can  attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and  cause lasting damage     Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying  climatic conditions  but also by air polution  road salt   tar  gravel and stone chipping  Grease and oil  fuel   coolant  brake fluid  bird droppings  insects  tree resins  etc  should be removed immediately to avoid paint  damage  Frequent washing reduces and or eliminates  the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse  influences     More frequent washings are necessary to deal with  unfavorable conditions  for example  near the ocean  in  industrial areas  smoke  exhaust emissions   or during  winter operation     You should check your vehicle from time to time for  stone chipping or other damage  Any damage should be  repaired as soon as possible to prevent the start of  corrosion     In doing so  do not neglect the underside of the vehicle   A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the  underbody followed by a thoroug
49.  8 liters      The warning lamp blinks when the fuel cap is not  closed  or a fuel system leak has been detected   Retighten cap and see if lamp goes out after restart and  next OBD selfcheck     If the warning lamp continues to blink after closing the  fuel cap correctly  have the fuel system checked at your  authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can  also cause the    CHECK ENGINE    lamp to illuminate  see  page 228     Warning     In the event a malfunction of the    SRS    is indicated  as outlined above  the    SRS    may not be  operational  For your safety  we strongly  recommend that you visit an authorized  Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the  system checked  otherwise the    SRS    may not be  activated when needed in an accident  which could  result in serious or fatal injury  or it might deploy  unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also  result in injury     SRS    1    P54 30 4557 21    J_A208 book Seite 230 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    231  Malfunction and indicator lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Electronic stability program  ESP      warning lamp    The yellow ESP warning lamp in the  speedometer dial comes on with the  electronic key in steering lock position 2   It should go out with engine running     See page 220 if the warning lamp lights up or flashes  when the 
50.  BAS and ESP are also  switched off  Both malfunction indicator lamps come on  with the engine running     If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts  the  malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is  switched off  When the voltage is above this value again   the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  ABS is operational     If the ABS malfunction indicator lamp stays illuminated   have the system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     Note     To alert following vehicles to slippery road conditions  you discover  operate your hazard warning flashers as  appropriate     Warning     ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  from acting on the vehicle  nor can it increase  braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded  by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or  the traction afforded  The ABS cannot prevent  accidents  including those resulting from excessive  speed in turns  following another vehicle too  closely  or aquaplaning  Only a safe  attentive  and  skillful driver can prevent accidents  The  capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never  be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner  which could jeopardize the user   s safety or the  safety of others     J_A208 book Seite 219 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    220  Driving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Electronic stability progra
51.  Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle     J_A208 book Seite 12 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    13  Introduction    Where to find it    The Operator   s Manual is divided into eight sections         Instruments and controls  An overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver   s seat         Operation  Information on the vehicle   s equipment and its operation         Driving  Important information on driving         Instrument cluster display  Displays and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster with brief instructions         Practical hints  Assistance and instructions in the event of an emergency         Car care  Instructions on caring for your vehicle         Technical data  All the important technical data for your vehicle as well as consumer information such as fuels   coolants  lubricants etc  is contained here         Index  Key terms to help you find a topic quickly     Other documents may also be supplied  depending on your vehicle   s equipment     Explanation of color used     Warning notices for the protection of yourself and  others appear on red background     J_A208 book Seite 13 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    14  Introduction    Problems with your vehicle    If you should experience a problem with your vehicle  particularly one that you believe may affect  its safe operation  we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center to  have the problem diagnosed and corrected if requi
52.  CLK 55 AMG   Your vehicle is factory equipped with    Y    rated tires   which have a speed rating of 188 mph  300 km h      An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from  exceeding a speed of 155 mph  250 km h      Despite the tire rating  local speed limits should be  obeyed  Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to  prevailing conditions     Warning     If ice has formed on the road  tire traction will be  substantially reduced  Under such weather  conditions  drive  steer and brake with extreme  caution     Warning     Even when permitted by law  never operate a  vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed  rating of the tires     J_A208 book Seite 210 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    211  Driving instructions    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Snow chains    Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended  by Mercedes Benz  Your authorized Mercedes Benz  Center will be glad to advise you on this subject     Chains should only be used on the rear wheels  Follow  the manufacturer   s mounting instructions     Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered  roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph  50 km h    Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on  roads without snow     When driving with snow chains  press the ESP control  switch to OFF  refer to page 222     Important     Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire sizes  225 45 R17 and 24
53.  Daytime running lamps  Canada only     When the engine is running and the selector lever is in  a driving position  the low beam headlamps  includes  parking lamps  side marker lamps  taillamps and  license plate lamps  are automatically switched on     When shifting from a driving position to position    N     or    P     the low beam switches off  2 seconds delay      For nighttime driving the exterior lamp switch should  be turned to position B to permit activation of the  high beam headlamps     Night security illumination    When exiting the vehicle after driving with the exterior  lamps on  they switch on again for added illumination  for approximately 30 seconds after closing the last door   The lamp on time period can be changed at your  Mercedes Benz Center     J_A208 book Seite 115 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    116  Headlamp cleaning system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Headlamp cleaning system   optional  standard on model CLK 55 AMG     The switch is located in the center console     The headlamp washer can be activated with the  electronic key in steering lock position 2     Briefly press symbol side of switch     P82 15 2007 26    J_A208 book Seite 116 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    117  Combination switch    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Combination sw
54.  Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    149  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Interior lighting  1 Automatic interior lighting    Press once and the automatic interior lighting is  activated     Interior lamps are switched on  and off  soft fade   delayed  when unlocking or locking the vehicle  or  when opening or closing a door  However  there will  be no  soft fade  delay when the electronic key is in  steering lock position 2     Press again and interior lamps remain switched off   even when centrally unlocking or opening a door     2 Press to switch interior and reading lamps on or off     3 Press to switch reading lamp on or off     4 Press to switch reading lamp on or off     Entrance lamps  exit lamps in doors    The lamps are switched on and off by the door contact  switches     Note     To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged   with doors open all interior lamps go out after  approximately 5 minutes     P68 00 2297 26    3  4    2    1    J_A208 book Seite 149 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    150  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Sun visors    Swing sun visors down to protect against sun glare     If sunlight enters through a side window  disengage  visor from inner mounting  pivot it to the side  and slide  it to the desi
55.  J_A208 book Seite 179 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    180  Catalytic converter    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Catalytic converter    Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type  catalytic converters  an important element in  conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve  substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust  emissions  Keep your vehicle in proper operating  condition by following our recommended maintenance  instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet     Caution     To prevent damage to the catalytic converters  use only  premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle     Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should  be repaired promptly  Otherwise  excessive unburned  fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to  overheat  which could start a fire     Warning     As with any vehicle  do not idle  park or operate  this vehicle in areas where combustible materials  such as grass  hay or leaves can come into contact  with the hot exhaust system  as these materials  could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire     J_A208 book Seite 180 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    181  Emission control    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Emission control    Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic  components of the exhaust gases withi
56.  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Engine cleaning    Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to  protect electrical components and connectors from the  intrusion of water and cleaning agents     Corrosion protection  such as MB Anticorrosion Wax  should be applied to the engine compartment after  every engine cleaning  Before applying  all control  linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated  The  poly V belt and all pulleys should be protected from any  wax     Tar stains    Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become  more difficult to remove  A tar remover is  recommended     Vehicle washing    Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct  sunlight  Use only a mild car wash detergent  such as  Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo     Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of  water  Direct only a very weak spray towards the  ventilation intake  Use plenty of water and rinse the  sponge and chamois frequently     Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a  chamois  Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the  finish     In the winter  thoroughly remove all traces of road salt  as soon as possible     When washing the underbody  do not forget to clean the  inner sides of the wheels     Ornamental moldings    For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome   plated parts  use a chrome cleaner     J_A208 book Seite 304 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    305  Cleaning and care of the vehicle    Technical  data  Instrument
57.  The  memory contents from the portable phone must be  downloaded and the telephone menu must be selected  in order to call up the phone book  Refer to the     Memory download    section of the cellular telephone  operation guide for more information     J_A208 book Seite 143 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    144  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Switching between name search and number search    Press ABC key   Name search    Press NUM key   Number search    Searching and selecting phone book entries by name    Press the ABC key  The current name is shown on the  display  The stored entries in alphabetical order can be  selected using the  or  button  By pressing the  or  buttons  the stored entries can be selected  according to alphabetical initial letters  e g  A Adam   B Brown  M Miller      Searching and selecting phone book entries by  number    Press the NUM key  The current number is shown on  the display  The stored entries can be selected in  numerical order using the  or  button  By  pressing the  or  buttons  the stored entries  can be selected in increments of 5  e g  Entry no  2   Entry no  7  etc       Placing a call    When a number or a name  has been selected using the  method described above   press the SND key     Manual repeat dialing  redial     The last number entered can be re selected by pressing  the SND key once and the call can be place
58.  and dust on CDs  Do not write on the  CDs or apply any label to the CDs     Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially  available cleaning cloth  No solvents  anti static sprays   etc  should be used     Replace the CD in its container after use  Protect CDs  from heat and direct sunlight     Only use CDs  which bear the  label shown and that conform to  the compact disc digital audio  standard  IEC 60908      Use of CDs which do not meet this  standard may cause damage to the  CD changer  Do not play single CDs  80 mm  with an  adapter     1  Optional equipment    Warning     The CD changer1 is a Class 1 laser product  There is  a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover is  opened or damaged     Do not remove the cover  The CD changer1 does not  contain any parts which can be serviced by the  user  For safety reasons  have any service work  which may be necessary performed only by  qualified personnel     J_A208 book Seite 139 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    140  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    CD changer installed    1 CD changer1    2 CD magazine    3 CD tray    4 CD    If a CD changer1 is installed  it can be operated from the  front control panel of the radio  A loaded magazine must  be installed for CD playing     1  Optional equipment    Loading emptying the CD magazine    Slide the changer door to the right and press the eject  button    
59.  antifreeze on hot engine  parts  because it may burn  You can be seriously  burned     J_A208 book Seite 259 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    260  Spare wheel  vehicle jack    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Spare wheel  vehicle tools  storage compartment    1 Trunk floor    2 Handle    3 Luggage bowl    4 Vehicle tools    Lift trunk floor and engage handle in grip molding of  luggage cover     To remove spare tire     Turn luggage bowl counterclockwise and remove     To store spare tire     Place spare tire in wheel well and secure it with luggage  bowl  Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop     Note     Always lower trunk floor before closing trunk lid     J_A208 book Seite 260 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    261  Spare wheel  vehicle jack    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Vehicle jack    1 Jack arm    2 Jack base    See illustration for proper storage of jack     Before storing the jack on the felt in the spare wheel  well  the jack arm must be lowered almost to the base of  the jack     1    2    P40 10 2027 26    Warning     The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the  vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the  vehicle  To help avoid personal injury  use the jack  only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change   Never get beneath the vehicle while 
60.  are  supported comfortably     2 Backrest bottom    3 Backrest center    4 Side bolster adjustment  Adjust the side bolster to provide good lateral  support     The seat cushion movement and amount of backrest  cushion height and curvature can be continuously  varied with regulators  1  2 and 3  after turning the  electronic key in steering lock to position 2     The side bolsters of the backrest can be adjusted with  rocker switch  4          press to the right     increase side support         press to the left     decrease side support     If the engine is turned off  the last cushion setting is  retained in memory  and automatically adjusts the  cushion to this setting when the engine is restarted     1  2  3    4    P91 25 2063 26    J_A208 book Seite 55 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    56  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Heated seats  front   optional  standard on model CLK 55 AMG     The front seat heater switches are located in the center  console     The front seat heaters can be switched on with the  electronic key in steering lock positions 1 or 2     Press switch to turn on seat heater     1 Normal seat heating mode  One indicator lamp in  the switch lights up     2 Rapid seat heating mode  Both indicator lamps in  the switch light up     After approximately 5 minutes in the rapid seat  heating mode  the seat heater automatically  switches to normal operat
61.  arrange for a replacement  It will be mailed to you     J_A208 book Seite 310 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    311  Technical data    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Identification labels    1 Certification label  2 Vehicle Identification Number  VIN     When ordering spare parts  please specify vehicle  identification and engine numbers     1    XXXXXXXXX    2    J_A208 book Seite 311 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    312  Technical data    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    CLK 320 shown    3 VIN  visible  lower edge of windshield     4 Engine number    5 Body number and paintwork number    6 Emission control label    7 Information label  California version  Vacuum line routing for emission control system    Layout of poly V belt drive    1 Automatic belt tensioner    2 Crankshaft    3 Air conditioner compressor    4 Coolant pump    5 Generator  alternator     6 Idler pulley    7 Power steering pump    6    5    7    3    4    J_A208 book Seite 312 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    313  Technical data    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Technical data    Model  CLK 320  208 465 1  CLK 430  208 470 1  CLK 55 AMG  208 474 1    Engine  112  113  113    Mode of operation  4 stroke e
62.  asked to provide your password  which you provided when you completed the subscriber  agreement     Then return to your vehicle and press trunk lock for  minimum of 20 seconds until the    SOS    button is  flashing  The message    EMERGENCY CALL        CALL  CONNECTED    appears in the multifunction display     As an alternative  you may unlock the vehicle via  Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly  after the completion of your Acquaintance Call     The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with  the remote door unlocking feature     Notes     The remote door unlock feature is available if the  relevant cellular phone network is available     The SOS button will flash and the message     EMERGENCY CALL     CALL CONNECTED    will appear  in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the  door unlock command     Once the vehicle is unlocked  a Response Center  specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the  vehicle occupants     If the trunk lock was pressed for more than 20 seconds  before door unlock authorization was received by the  Response Center  you must wait 15 minutes before  pressing trunk lock again     J_A208 book Seite 190 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    191  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Stolen vehicle tracking services    In the event your vehicle was stolen  report the incident  to the police who will i
63.  below 31 mph  50 km h  at partial throttle and engine  temperatures below 95  F  35  C      To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever  is moved to a lower gear range  the transmission will not  shift to a lower gear  if the engine   s revolutions per  minute limit would be exceeded  In this case there will  be no downshift  even when the vehicle speed reaches  the engine   s RPM limit of that gear  e g  by applying the  service brakes     To prevent the engine from laboring at low RPM when  driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily  loaded  the automatic transmission will downshift when  necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best  torque range     Warning     On slippery road surfaces  never downshift in order  to obtain braking action  This could result in drive  wheel slip and reduced vehicle control  Your  vehicle   s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of  control     J_A208 book Seite 200 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    201  Automatic transmission    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Gear ranges     Upshift through 4th gear only  Suitable for  performance driving     Upshift through 3rd gear only  Suitable for  moderately steep hills  Since the transmission  does not shift higher than 3rd gear  this gear  selection will allow use of the engine   s braking  power downhill     Upshift through 2nd gear only  For driving in  mountainous regio
64.  button hangs up and display  3   appears     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     J_A208 book Seite 97 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    98  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Redialing  1 The telephone is ready for use     2 Number or name stored in the redial memory     3 Number in the redial memory     redialing has  commenced     4 Dialing is completed and the name stored in the  telephone book is displayed or the number dialed  will remain displayed if no name has been stored   The display remains for the duration of the call     5 Duration of call     6 Memory location numbers     the 10 most recently  dialed numbers are stored   L0  most recently dialed number   L1 to L9  previously dialed numbers     P54 30 3580 27    J_A208 book Seite 98 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    99  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    The telephone must be switched on     Press the    or    button repeatedly until the  display  1  appears     Pressing the    button activates the redial memory  and the most recently dialed number is displayed     Pressing the j or k button    browses    forwards or  backwards through the redial memory  The number or  name selecte
65.  buttons on the  alpha numeric keypad  Press the     function button   followed by the track number     J_A208 book Seite 142 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    143  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Telephone operation    Various functions of the Mercedes Benz integrated  cellular telephone1 can be performed and displayed via  the car radio  Further instructions for operating the car  telephone can be found in the operation guide for the  cellular telephone1     Switching the telephone on and off    Switching on  Press the  button     TEL    appears in the  corner of the display     Switching off  Press and hold  the  button until the telephone symbol    TEL    no  longer appears in the display  or press the    PWR    button  on the phone   s keypad     1  Optional equipment    Entering telephone number and starting dialing  process    Enter the desired telephone  number using the alpha   numeric keypad  The number  can have up to 32 digits  but  only 13 of these can be  displayed  The dialing process is started by pressing the  SND button  The entered number can be corrected using  the    CLR    key     Press the CLR key briefly    and the last digit will be  deleted     Press the CLR key longer   and  the complete number will be deleted     Calling up the phone book    The numbers stored in the telephone memory can be  called up via either name or number entries 
66.  cellular  telephone  For further information and installation  contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center     Warning     A driver   s attention to the road must always be his   her primary focus when driving  For your safety  and the safety of others  we recommend that you  pull over to a safe location and stop before placing  or taking a telephone call  If you choose to use the  telephone while driving  please use the hands free  device and only use the telephone when road and  traffic conditions permit     Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a  cellular telephone while driving a vehicle     Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph   approximately 50 km h   your vehicle is covering  a distance of approximately 50 feet  approximately  14 m  every second     Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a  built in or attached antenna  i e  without being  connected to an external antenna  from inside the  vehicle while the engine is running  Doing so could  lead to a malfunction of the vehicle   s electronic  system  possibly resulting in an accident and  personal injury     Warning     Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a  cellular telephone while driving a vehicle  Whether  or not prohibited by law  for safety reasons  the  driver should not use the cellular telephone while  the vehicle is in motion  Stop the vehicle in a safe  location before answering or placing a call     J_A208 book Seite 157 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    158  G
67.  distance remaining     The message is displayed for approx  10 seconds when  turning the electronic key in steering lock to position 2   or while driving when reaching the service warning  threshold     The symbols and messages indicate the type of service  to be performed     9 Service A       Service B    One of the following messages will appear in the display   e g  Service A         SERVICE A     IN xx DAYS        SERVICE A     IN xx MILES     Canada  KM      SERVICE A     EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS        SERVICE A     EXCEEDED BY xx MILES     Canada  KM      SERVICE A     DUE NOW       The next service due date is displayed either in days or  in miles  depending on your driving style     Once the suggested service term has passed  the symbol  and message appear for approx  30 seconds and a signal  sounds every time when turning the electronic key in  steering lock to position 2     10    0    40    60    80    60    40    mph    20km h  20    100    120    140    160    80    100  180    200    220    240    160  120  140    J_A208 book Seite 109 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    110  Flexible service system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    The service indicator disappears automatically after  30 seconds or if button J on the instrument cluster is  pressed     Calling up service indicator manually     Turn the electronic key in steering lock to position 1  or 2     Call up th
68.  driving  the coolant  level has dropped below the required level  If no leaks  are noticeable and the engine temperature does not  increase  continue to drive to the nearest service station  and have coolant added to the coolant system     The low engine coolant level warning should not be  ignored  Extended driving with the symbol displayed  may cause serious engine damage not covered by the  Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     In cases of major or frequent minor coolant loss  have  the cooling system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     Notes     Do not drive without coolant in the cooling system  The  engine will overheat causing major engine damage     Monitor the coolant temperature gauge while driving     See page 257 for instructions on adding coolant     Line 1  Line 2    COOLANT  CHECK LEVEL     Warning     Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts   Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may  burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts   You can be seriously burned     J_A208 book Seite 240 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    241  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    COOLANT TEMP   coolant temperature     1  Observe coolant temperature gauge  see page 86   Check coolant level  see page 257     This may indicate that the poly V belt has broken  Should this  condition occur  the poly V belt mus
69.  driving maneuvers     J_A208 book Seite 223 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    224  What you should know at the gas station    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    What you should know at the gas station    Fuel supply    Open flap by pushing near front  arrow   Turn fuel cap  to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure in  tank has been released  then remove cap  Failure to  remove slowly could result in personal injury     Manual release of fuel filler flap  see page 299     Fuel    To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air  fully  insert filler nozzle unit  Only fill fuel tank until the filler  nozzle unit cuts out     do not top up or overfill     Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can  cause the    CHECK ENGINE    lamp to illuminate     Fuel tank capacity approx  16 4 US gal  62 0 l    This includes approx  2 1 US gal  8 0 l  reserve  Use  premium unleaded gasoline  Posted Octane Index 91   Average of 96 RON 86 MON      Warning     Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous  It  burns violently and can cause serious injury   Whenever you are around gasoline  avoid inhaling  fumes and skin contact  extinguish all smoking  materials  Never allow sparks  flame or smoking  materials near gasoline     Warning     Overfilling of fuel tank may result in creating  pressure in the system which could cause a gas  discharge such as the gas spraying back out
70.  few minutes  Start engine of  the disabled vehicle in the usual manner     6  After the engine has started  remove jumper cables  by exactly reversing the above installation  sequence  starting with the last connection made  first  When removing each clamp  make sure that it  does not touch any other metal while the other end  is still attached     Notes     If engine does not run after several unsuccessful  starting attempts  have it checked at the nearest  authorized Mercedes Benz Center     Excessive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic  converter     J_A208 book Seite 275 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    276  Towing    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Towing the vehicle  Important     When towing the vehicle  please  note the following     With the automatic central locking activated and the  electronic key in steering lock position 2  the vehicle  doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear  wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx  9 mph   15 km h  or more     To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking   deactivate the automatic central locking  see page 36     Warning     Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the  ground  make certain that the electronic key is in  steering lock position 2  The maximum towing  speed and distance with the vehicle on the ground  is 30 mph  50 km h  and 30 miles  50 km      If the electronic key is left 
71.  including  incorrect installation and removal  can lead to  possible injury through an unintended  activation of the    SRS            In addition  through improper work there is  the risk of rendering the    SRS    inoperative or  causing unintended airbag deployment  Work  on the    SRS    must therefore only be performed  by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center         For your protection and the protection of  others  when scrapping the airbag unit or  emergency tensioning retractor  our safety  instructions must be followed  These  instructions are available at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center         Given the considerable deployment speed and  the textile structure of the airbags  there is the  possibility of abrasions or other injuries  resulting from airbag deployment     J_A208 book Seite 74 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    75  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Infant and child restraint systems    We recommend all infants and children be properly re   strained at all times while the vehicle is in motion  All  lap shoulder belts except the driver   s seat belt have  special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child  restraints     To activate  pull shoulder belt out completely and let it  retract  During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting  sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt  retractor is activated  The belt is 
72.  injure rear  seated occupants     Before operating the roll bar switch make sure that  the roll bar   s path is clear and no persons due to  inattention are injured by the moving roll bar     For your own safety we recommend to drive with  the roll bar raised  if        the outside temperature is below  5  F   15  C          the rear seats are occupied by passengers     Before working on the vehicle  e g  when changing  wheels  the roll bar should be raised with the  switch  and the electronic key should be removed  from the steering lock  to prevent possible injury     In case of potential danger release the switch to  immediately interrupt the operating procedure     J_A208 book Seite 52 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    53  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Switch for roll bar and head restraints  rear    The switch is located in the center console     Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2     Press switch     1 Raise roll bar    2 Lower roll bar    The lowering or raising procedure is immediately  interrupted by releasing the roll bar switch     With the engine running and the roll bar lowered  the  warning lamp in the roll bar switch will blink for  approx  15 seconds  The blinking is reminding you to  raise the roll bar if the rear passenger seats are  occupied  See also page 233 for roll bar warning lamp     Important     The roll bar is intended to b
73.  key from steering lock  Remove blockage     Activate combination switch again  electronic key in  steering lock position 1      Hazard warning flasher switch    The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the  switch located in the dashboard     To activate hazard warning flasher  press switch once   To deactivate  press switch again     Note     With the hazard warning flasher activated  the  combination switch in position for either left or right  turn  and the electronic key in steering lock position 2   only the respective left or right side turn signals will  operate     J_A208 book Seite 119 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    120  Automatic climate control    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Automatic climate control    P83 40 2157 29    1    3  3    6    2    4            Mercedes Benz    DOLBY STEREO    5    J_A208 book Seite 120 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    121  Automatic climate control    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    1 Air volume control for center air outlets  turn wheel  up to open     2 Air volume control for side air outlet     To open air outlets  Turn wheel to position i     3 Center air outlet  adjustable    4 Side air outlet  adjustable    5 Display and controls    The system is always at operational readiness  except  when manually switched off     T
74.  open about every 4 months     Dry cleaning     Brush top  always from front to rear  with a soft bristled  brush     Wet cleaning     Brush the dry top  Wash with a mild detergent and an  ample supply of lukewarm water by wiping with a soft   bristled brush or sponge from front to rear  Then rinse  thoroughly with clear water     If only parts of the top have been washed  wet the entire  top and allow it to air dry before lowering it into the  storage compartment     Do not use sharp edged instruments for the removal of  ice and snow     Notes     When you run the vehicle through an automatic car  wash  never use hot wax for conservation     Depending on the operation mode of the car wash  there  is the possibility of water drops entering the vehicle   s  interior     Never use a power washer to clean the soft top  as you  may damage the soft top material     Remove bird droppings immediately  The organic acid  damages the material and causes the soft top to leak     In general  regular spraying or cleansing with clear  water is sufficient to keep the top clean     Wash the top only when heavily soiled     Light colored soft tops should be cleaned frequently to  prevent spots and dirt from setting in  which could stain  and discolor the soft top material permanently     Caution     Never use any gasoline  thinner  tar and stain removers   glass cleaner  or similar organic solvents to clean the  soft top or wind screen  They will cause damage which  is not covered by the Merc
75.  or all of the equipment described in this manual  Therefore  you may find explanations  for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle  If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment   your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures     Service and warranty information    The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your  Mercedes Benz  including         New Car Limited Warranty         Emission System Warranty         Emission Performance Warranty         California  Massachusetts  and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty   California  Massachusetts  and Vermont only          State Warranty Enforcement Laws  Lemon Laws      J_A208 book Seite 8 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    9  Introduction    Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes Benz automobiles    Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease  price  if Mercedes Benz USA  LLC and or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ore more substantial  defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair  attempts  During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles on  the odometer of the vehicle  whichever occurs first  a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a re
76.  order    4        3        2        1        Press and hold selector lever in the    direction   The selector lever position display will switch to the  gear range currently selected by the automatic  transmission   The transmission will only shift down one gear if the  gear range currently selected has already shifted to its  highest possible gear     Briefly press selector lever in the    direction   The transmission will shift from the current gear range  to the next higher gear range  If the transmission is  already in gear range    D     an additional upshift of one  gear is possible     J_A208 book Seite 199 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    200  Automatic transmission    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Press and hold selector lever in the    direction   The transmission will shift from the current gear  directly to gear range    D        Important     With transmission in gear range    D        4    or    3      upshifting from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed  depending on vehicle speed and engine temperature   This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more  quickly to operating temperatures     During the brief warm up period this delayed upshift  and increased engine noise might be perceived as a  malfunction  However  neither the engine nor  transmission are negatively affected by this mode of  operation     The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds 
77.  parts  distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts  service     More than 300 000 different spare parts  for  Mercedes Benz models  are available     Mercedes Benz original spare parts are subjected to  stringent quality inspections  Each part has been  specifically developed  manufactured or selected for and  adapted to Mercedes Benz vehicles     Therefore  Mercedes Benz original spare parts should  be installed     Important     The use of non genuine parts and accessories not  authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle  which damage is not covered by the Mercedes Benz  Limited Warranty or compromise its durability or safety     Warranty coverage    Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the     warranties    printed in the Service and Warranty  Information booklet and your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center will exchange or repair any  defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in  accordance with the terms of the following warranties     1  New vehicle limited warranty    2  Emission system warranty    3  Emission performance warranty    4  California  Massachusetts  and Vermont emission  control systems warranty    Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the  Mercedes Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties   copies of which are available at any Mercedes Benz  Center     Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet    Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information  booklet  have your authorized Mercedes Benz Center 
78.  restraint  system  SRS  indicator lamp     230  Fuel reserve and fuel cap  placement warning                    230  Electronic stability program   ESP      warning lamp                 231  BAS ESP malfunction  indicator lamp                              231    ABS malfunction  indicator lamp                              231  Telescoping steering column      indicator lamp                              232  Seat belt warning lamp              232  Malfunction and  indicator lamps in the  center console                            232  AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp      232  Roll bar warning lamp                233  Malfunction and  warning messages in the  multifunction display                234  DISPLAY DEFECTIVE   engine control unit                    235  DISPLAY DEFECTIVE   several systems                          235  BATTERY ALTERNATOR            236  ABS SYSTEM                                237  BRAKE ASSIST                            237  BRAKE LINING WEAR               238  BRAKE FLUID                              238  PARKING BRAKE                        239    J_A208 book Seite 3 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    4  Contents    ENGINE FAN                                239  COOLANT  coolant level            240  COOLANT TEMP    coolant temperature                  241  LIGHTING SYSTEM                     242  LIGHT SENSOR                            243  STEER  WHEEL ADJUST             243  ENGINE OIL LEVEL                    244  ELEC  STABIL  PROG    Electronic s
79.  signals on the exterior mirrors are  equipped with LEDs     Have the system checked at an authorized  Mercedes Benz Center if a fault or defect occurs     Adjusting headlamp aim    Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important   To check and readjust a headlamp  follow steps 1  through 5     Please note         Low beam adjustments simultaneously aim the high  beam         Vehicle should have a normal trunk load     1  Park vehicle on level surface approximately 25 ft    7 6 m  from a vertical test screen or wall  The  centerline of the vehicle must be at a 90   angle to  the test screen     J_A208 book Seite 285 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    286  Exterior lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    2   Low beams on      Using a carpenter   s level  align and mark a vertical  centerline  8  on the test screen using the vertex of  the angle formed in each beam image  As a check   the distance between centerlines should be  49 1 4 inches  1250 mm   If the distance does not  check  have the system verified at an authorized  Mercedes Benz Center     3   Low beams off      Measure the vertical height from the floor to  reference point  10  on high beam lens  Subtract  approx  2 inches  53 mm  from measurement  and  mark a horizontal centerline  9  on the test screen at  the resulting height from the floor  It must be at a  90   angle to the vertical centerline     4  Open hood
80.  the cleaning and care of  your vehicle and give important    how to    information as  well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car care  products     Additional information can be found in the booklet titled     Vehicle Care Guide        Power washer    When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle  always observe manufacturer   s operating instructions     Caution     Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires  The  intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire     Always replace a damaged tire     Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface   Do not aim directly at soft top  electrical parts  electrical  connectors  seals  or other rubber parts     Paintwork  painted body components    Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied  when water drops on the paint surface do not    bead up      normally in 3 to 5 months  depending on climate and  washing detergent used     Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be  applied if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding   i e  loss of gloss      Do not apply any of these products or wax if your  vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot     Use the appropriate MB Touch Up Stick for quick and  provisional repairs of minor paint damage  i e  chips  from stones  vehicle doors etc       J_A208 book Seite 303 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    304  Cleaning and care of the vehicle    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display 
81.  the main fuse box  engage back end of cover  and let front end snap into place     1    J_A208 book Seite 252 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    253  Fuses    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Auxiliary fuse box below the trunk floor    2 Auxiliary fuse box below the trunk floor     To gain access  lift trunk floor     Auxiliary fuse box in the dashboard    3 Auxiliary fuse box to left of exterior lamp switch     To gain access  open door  pry off cover  3  and  remove     2    P    J_A208 book Seite 253 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    254  Engine compartment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Hood    Warning     To help prevent personal injury  stay clear of  moving parts when the hood is open and the engine  is running  Be sure the hood is properly closed  before driving  When closing hood  use extreme  caution not to catch hands or fingers     The radiator fan may continue to run for  approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the  engine has been turned off  Stay clear from fan  blades     The engine is equipped with a transistorized  ignition system  Because of the high voltage it is  dangerous to touch any components  ignition coils   spark plug sockets  diagnostic socket  of the  ignition system        with the engine running         while starting the engine         if 
82.  thickness and leaks     BRAKE    Warning     Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated  can result in an accident  Have your brake system  checked immediately if the brake warning lamp  stays on  Don   t add brake fluid before checking the  brake system  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir  can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine  parts and the brake fluid catching fire  You can be  seriously burned     J_A208 book Seite 229 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    230  Malfunction and indicator lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Supplemental restraint system  SRS  indicator lamp    The operational readiness of the airbag  system is verified by the indicator lamp     SRS    in the instrument cluster when  turning the electronic key in steering lock to position 1  or 2  If no malfunction is detected  the lamp will go out  after approximately 4 seconds  after the lamp goes out   the system continues to monitor the components and  circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a  malfunction by coming on again     See page 67 for notes on airbags  see page 66 for belt  tensioners and page 75 for infant and child seat  restraint     Fuel reserve and fuel cap placement warning    When the warning lamp  1  comes on after starting the  engine  or if it comes on while driving  it indicates that  the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of  approximately 2 1 gal 
83.  upon  removing the filler nozzle which could cause  personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 224 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    225  What you should know at the gas station    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index        Engine oil    Engine oil level check  see page 112 and page 256     Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick  marking level  2 1 US qt  2 0 l      Recommended engine oils  see Approved Service  Products sheet         Coolant    For normal replenishing  use water  potable water  quality      For further information  e g  anticorrosion   antifreeze   see page 318         Spark plugs    Approved spark plugs  see page 316         Tire pressure    For tire pressure  refer to tire pressure label inside  the fuel filler flap  See page 271 for further details         Air conditioner    R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant  see  page 318         Bulbs    High and low beams  H7  55 W    low beam  Xenon  optional   fog lamps  H1  55 W    turn signal lamps   front 1156 NA  26 9 5 W 32 4 cp    parking and standing lamps  front  H 6W  6 W    side marker lamps  front  5 W 4 cp   turn signal lamps  rear  21 W 24 cp   stop  tail  parking and side marker lamps  21 4 W   tail and parking lamp  5 W 4 cp   rear fog lamp  driver   s side  21 W 32 cp   backup lamps  21 W 32 cp   license plate lamps  5 W 4 cp     J_A208 book Seite 225 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    226  Chec
84.  vehicle  or with access  to an unlocked vehicle  Unsupervised use of vehicle  equipment may cause serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 155 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    156  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Cargo tie down rings    1 Ring    Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on the two  rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold the cargo     Parcel net in front passenger footwell    A small convenience parcel net is located in the front  passenger footwell  It is for small and light items  such  as road maps  mail  etc      Note     With large objects stored in the parcel net do not slide  the seat fully forward  it could damage them     Armrest  rear bench    Pull down the armrest by its top     Warning     Do not place heavy or fragile objects  or objects  having sharp edges  in the parcel net     In an accident  during hard braking or sudden  maneuvers  they could be thrown around inside  the vehicle  and cause injury to vehicle occupants     J_A208 book Seite 156 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    157  Telephone    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Telephone  general  Note     See separate instruction manual for instructions on how  to operate the telephone     Cellular telephone    The vehicle is prepared for the installation of a
85.  vehicle is currently outside the transmitter or  receiver range     3 The telephone is ready for use     4 Name selected from the telephone book     5 Number for the name selected  Dialing commences     6 Dialing is completed  The name is displayed  The  display remains for the duration of the call     7 Duration of call     8 Memory location number   8    P54 30 3578 27    J_A208 book Seite 96 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    97  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    The telephone must be switched on     Press the    or    button repeatedly until the  display  3  appears  Refer to the separate telephone  instruction manual     Pressing j or k    browses    alphabetically  forwards or backwards through the telephone book   providing it was previously downloaded  See telephone  operator   s manual for details concerning downloading   Pressing button j or k for longer than a second     browses    rapidly through the telephone book   The name selected appears in the display     Note     Press the    button if you do not wish to make a call     The procedure is cancelled and display  3  appears     Press the    button when the name you require  appears in the display  4   The telephone number  5  is  dialed     The name will be displayed when dialing is completed   Display  6  remains for the duration of the call     Pressing the   
86.  vehicles built prior to September 2001     The emergency release button  1  is located in the trunk  lid     Briefly press emergency release button  1    All doors  the fuel filler flap  and the trunk unlock  and  the trunk lid opens     The vehicle production date  e g  09 01  can be found  on the certification label  which is located on the  driver   s door pillar  see page 311     Note     The emergency release button  1  only unlocks and  opens the trunk while the vehicle is not in motion     Important     The emergency trunk lid release button  1  does not  open the trunk lid  if the trunk has been locked using  the mechanical key or if the vehicle battery is  discharged or disconnected     Illumination of the emergency release button  1      The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the  trunk     The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the  trunk     1    J_A208 book Seite 41 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    42  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Trunk lid emergency release   vehicles built September 2001 and later     The emergency release button  1  is located in the trunk  lid     Briefly press emergency release button  1    The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid opens     The vehicle production date  e g  09 01  can be found  on the certification label  which is located on the  driver   s door pillar  see page 311     Importan
87.  windows will close  If the roll bar was previously in the  upright position  it will return to that position     The side windows can also be closed opened later on   Press lift soft top switch twice and hold  see page 148     However  the side windows and the roll bar can also be  activated using their respective switches  see page 146  and page 53     P77 30 2070 26    1    2    J_A208 book Seite 167 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    168  Soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Note     For safety reasons  the soft top cannot be raised while  driving     Warning     The soft top is not fully closed and locked         if the indicator lamp in the soft top switch does  not got out  electronic key in steering lock  position 2          if the indicator lamp blinks  and a signal  sounds for 10 seconds when starting to drive     Stop the vehicle and before continuing to drive   close and lock the soft top     If the soft top is not locked  it may fold back or  forward when driving     During soft top operation  do not place your hands  near the roll bar  soft top frame  upper windshield  area or soft top storage compartment  Serious  personal injury may occur     To prevent possible accidents  drive the vehicle  only with the soft top either completely closed and  locked  or fully lowered into its storage  compartment     J_A208 book Seite 168 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09  
88.  wiper blade insert into  retainer claws until tabs are engaged     Insert wiper blade between tabs  3  on the wiper arm   and slide into end of wiper arm  Press safety tab upward  until it locks in place     3    2    1    P82 30 0333 26    J_A208 book Seite 300 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    301  Contents     Vehicle care    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Vehicle care    Cleaning and care  of the vehicle                              302  Power washer                               303  Paintwork  painted body  components                                  303  Engine cleaning                           304  Tar stains                                      304  Vehicle washing                          304  Ornamental moldings                 304  Headlamps  taillamps   turn signal lenses                       305  Window cleaning                         305  Plastic and rubber parts             305    Wiper blade                                 305  Light alloy wheels                      305  Instrument cluster                      306  Steering wheel and  gear selector lever                      306  Cup holder                                   306  Seat belts                                      306  Headliner                                     306  Upholstery                                   307  Hard plastic trim items              307  Plastic and rubber parts           
89. 001 9 35 09    274  Jump starting    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Jump starting  Important     A discharged battery can freeze at approx   14  F      10  C   In that case  it must be thawed out before  jumper cables are used  Attempting to jump start a  frozen battery can result in it exploding  causing  personal injury     Jumper cable specifications         Minimum cable cross section of 25 mm2 or approx   2 AWG        Maximum length of 11 5 ft   3 5 m      If the battery is discharged  the engine should be started  with jumper cables and the  12 V  battery of another  vehicle     Only use 12 V battery to jump start your vehicle  Jump  starting with more powerful battery could damage the  vehicle   s electrical systems  which will not be covered  by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     The battery is located in the trunk under the trunk floor     Warning     Failure to follow these directions will cause  damage to the electronic components  and can lead  to a battery explosion and severe injury or death     Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump  starting  you might get injured     Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid  Do not allow  this fluid to come in contact with eyes  skin or  clothing  In case it does  immediately flush affected  area with water  and seek medical help if  necessary     A battery will also produce hydrogen gas  which is  flammable and very 
90. 117    7 ESP warning lamp  see page 231    8 Speedometer    9 Trip odometer  see page 87    10 Main odometer    11 Multifunction indicator  see page 88  or FSS indicator  see page 109  or engine oil level indicator  see page 112    12 Right turn signal indicator lamp  see combination  switch on page 117    13 Tachometer  see page 87    14 Gear range indicator display  see selector lever  positions on page 198    15 Clock  see page 106    J_A208 book Seite 83 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    84  Instrument cluster    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster    High beam    ABS malfunction  see page 231    Brake fluid low  except Canada    see page 229  Parking brake engaged  see page 229    Brake fluid low  Canada only    see page 229  Parking brake engaged  see page 229    BAS malfunction  see page 231  ESP malfunction  see page 231 and 245    ESP  Adjust driving to road condition   see page 220    Fasten seat belts  see page 232    Telescoping steering column not locked   see page 232    SRS malfunction  see page 230    If the    CHECK ENGINE    malfunction  indicator lamp comes on when the engine is  running  it indicates a malfunction of the  fuel management system  emission control  system  systems which impact emissions  or  the fuel cap is not closed tight  In all cases   we recommend that you have the  malfunction checked as soon as possi
91. 13  Reporting Safety Defects                  15    Instruments and controls    Instruments and controls                 18  Center console                               20  Overhead control panel                21    Operation    Vehicle keys                                       24  Start lock out                                     26  General notes on the  central locking system                26  Central locking system                    27  Radio frequency and infrared  remote control                               27  Opening and closing  windows from outside                  31    Panic button                                   32  Mechanical keys                            32  Doors                                                   33  Central locking switch                      35  Automatic central locking            36  Emergency unlocking in  case of accident                            36  Trunk                                                   37  Trunk lamp                                         39  Trunk lid release switch                  40  Trunk lid emergency release          41  Trunk lid emergency release          42  Antitheft alarm system                     43  Tow away alarm                                 44  Power seats  front                              45  Front head restraints                    51  Roll bar and head  restraints  rear                              52  Backrest                                              54  Multicontour seat    
92. 20 lb  100 kg     Model  CLK 320  CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG    Overall vehicle length  180 2 in  4577 mm   179 8 in  4567 mm   179 8 in  4567 mm     Overall vehicle width  67 8 in  1722 mm   67 8 in  1722 mm   67 8 in  1722 mm     Overall height  54 3 in  1380 mm   54 3 in  1380 mm   54 6 in  1386 mm     Wheel base  105 9 in  2690 mm   105 9 in  2690 mm   105 9 in  2690 mm     Track  front  59 3 in  1505 mm   59 3 in  1505 mm   59 3 in  1505 mm     Track  rear  58 0 in  1474 mm   58 6 in  1488 mm   58 6 in  1488 mm     J_A208 book Seite 317 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    318  Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc    capacities    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc      capacities    Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match  Therefore use only brands tested and recommended  by us  Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet  or inquire at your Mercedes Benz Center     Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc   Model  Capacity    Engine with oil filter   recommended engine oils   CLK 320  CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG  8 5 US qt  8 0 l   8 0 US qt  7 5 l     Automatic transmission   automatic transmission fluid   CLK 320  CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG  8 5 US qt  8 0 l   9 6 US qt  9 1 l     Rear axle   Hypoid gear oil SAE 90  85 W 90   1 4 US qt  1 3 l     Power steering   MB Power steering fluid   approx  1 1 US qt  1 0 l     Front wheel hubs   h
93. 2001 9 35 09    154  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Ashtray    Center console  front    By touching the bottom of the cover lightly  the ashtray  opens automatically     Prior to removing the ashtray insert  move the gear  selector lever to position    N        To remove ashtray     Push sliding knob  1  toward the right to eject the  insert     To install ashtray     Install insert into ashtray frame and push down to  engage     Warning     Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing  still  With the gear selector lever in position    N      turn off the engine and set the parking brake   Otherwise the vehicle might move as a result of  unintended contact with the gear selector lever     J_A208 book Seite 154 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    155  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Lighter  Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2   Push in lighter  1   it will pop out automatically when  hot     The lighter socket can be used to accommodate  electrical accessories up to maximum 85 W     Warning     Never touch the heating element or sides of the  lighter  they are extremely hot  hold at knob only     When leaving the vehicle always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  Do not leave  children unattended in the
94. 5 40 R17     Winter driving instructions    The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to  drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration  braking  and steering maneuvers  Do not use the cruise control  system under such conditions     When the vehicle is in danger of skidding  move  selector lever to position    N     Try to keep the vehicle  under control by corrective steering action     Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking  efficiency  Increased pedal force may become necessary  to produce the normal brake effect  We therefore  recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically  when traveling at length on salt strewn roads  This can  bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to  normal  A prerequisite is  however  that this be done  without endangering other drivers on the road     Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are  rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of  vehicle control and resulting in personal injury  and possible death     J_A208 book Seite 211 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    212  Driving instructions    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated  roads  the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as  possible after driving is resumed while observing the  safety rules in the previous paragraph     Winter driving    Have your vehicle winterized at your au
95. 6    7 Trunk lid release switch  see page 40    8 Mirror adjustment switch  see page 79    9 Right power window switch  rear   see page 146    10 AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp  see page 232    ESP  ESP    P68 10 2555 27    10    1    2    3    6  7  8  9    5  4    J_A208 book Seite 20 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    21  Instruments and controls    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Overhead control panel  1 Tele Aid  emergency call system   see page 182    2 Interior lighting  see page 149    3 Hands free microphone for Tele Aid  telephone and  voice recognition system     4 Rear view mirror  see page 78    5 Garage door opener  see page 158    4    5    3    2    1    J_A208 book Seite 21 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    22  Contents     Operation    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Operation    Vehicle keys                                       24  Start lock out                                     26  General notes on the  central locking system                26  Central locking system                    27  Radio frequency and infrared  remote control                               27  Opening and closing  windows from outside                  31  Panic button                                   32  Mechanical keys                            32  Doors                               
96. 6  Exterior lamps                                280  Headlamp assembly                    281  Taillamp assemblies                   283  Adjusting headlamp aim               285    Changing batteries in  the electronic key                      288  Synchronizing remote  control                                          290  Raising soft top manually              291  Antenna                                            298  Manual release for  fuel filler flap                              299  Replacing wiper blade insert        299    Vehicle care    Cleaning and care  of the vehicle                              302  Power washer                               303  Paintwork  painted body  components                                  303  Engine cleaning                           304  Tar stains                                      304  Vehicle washing                          304  Ornamental moldings                 304  Headlamps  taillamps   turn signal lenses                       305  Window cleaning                        305  Plastic and rubber parts             305    J_A208 book Seite 4 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    5  Contents    Wiper blade                                  305  Light alloy wheels                       305  Instrument cluster                      306  Steering wheel and  gear selector lever                       306  Cup holder                                    306  Seat belts                                      306  Headliner                 
97. 73  Infant and child  restraint systems                           75  Adjusting telescoping  steering column                           77  Inside rear view mirror                   78  Antiglare night position               78  Exterior rear view mirrors              79  Instrument cluster                            82  Indicator lamps in the  instrument cluster                       84  Multifunction steering wheel   multifunction display                  88  Trip and main odometer  and sub menu                               92  Audio systems                                   93  Radio                                               93  CD player                                        94  Cassette player                              95    J_A208 book Seite 22 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    23  Contents     Operation    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Telephone                                           96  Telephone book                             96  Redialing                                        98  Incoming call                               100  Navigation system                            101  Trip computer                                  102  Malfunction warning  message memory                       104  Individual settings                          106  Setting the audio volume               108  Flexible service system   FSS                                           
98. 8 book Seite 33 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    34  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    If the vehicle has previously been locked from the  outside  opening a door from the inside will trigger the  alarm  When opening a door while the central locking  system is in the         selective unlocking mode  only that individual door  is unlocked  The remaining door  the trunk and fuel  filler flap remain locked         global unlocking mode  both doors  the trunk and  fuel filler flap are unlocked     Notes     When opening a door  the door window lowers slightly   After closing the door  the window closes again     In case of a malfunction in the central locking system  the doors can be locked and unlocked individually     To lock  push down lock button and turn mechanical key  in driver   s door lock to position 3  In addition lock the  trunk     To unlock  pull inside door handle and turn mechanical  key in driver   s door lock to position 2     When unlocking the driver   s door with the mechanical  key  the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will  sound     To cancel the alarm  insert the electronic key in the  steering lock or press button    or     on the  electronic key     J_A208 book Seite 34 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    35  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster displa
99. CLK Class Cabriolet  Operator   s Manual    J_A208 book Seite 1 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    CLK 320  CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG    J_A208 book Seite 2 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz     Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name  Further  it exemplifies your desire  to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service     Your Mercedes Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen  To ensure your pleasure of  ownership  and for your safety and that of your passengers  we ask you to make a small investment of your time         Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside  Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for  your reference         Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual  They are designed to acquaint you with the  operation of your Mercedes Benz         Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual  They are designed to help improve the safety  of the vehicle operator and occupants     We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe  pleasurable driving     DaimlerChrysler AG    J_A208 book Seite 3 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    1  Contents    Introduction    Product information                           7  Operator   s manual                               8  Where to find it                                  
100. Car care  Index    Stopping    For brief stops  e g  at traffic lights  leave the  transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service  brake     For longer stops with the engine idling  shift into    N     or    P    and hold the vehicle with the service brake     When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient  do not  hold it with the accelerator  use the brake  This avoids  unnecessary transmission heat build up     Maneuvering    To maneuver in tight areas  e g  when pulling into a  parking space  control the vehicle speed by gradually  releasing the brakes  Accelerate gently and never  abruptly step on the accelerator     To rock a vehicle out of soft ground  mud or snow    alternately shift from forward to reverse  while applying  slight partial throttle     Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the  ABS or traction system malfunction indicator lamp to  come on  Turn off and restart the engine to clear the  malfunction indication     Warning     Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever  not fully engaged in position    P    is dangerous   Also  when parked on an incline  position    P    alone  may not prevent your vehicle from moving   possibly hitting people or objects     Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting  to position    P     see page 204 for parking brake     When parked on an incline  also turn front wheel  against curb     Warning     When leaving the vehicle  always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  an
101. Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Inside rear view mirror    Manually adjust the inside mirror     Use your inside mirror to determine the size and  distance of objects seen in the passenger side convex  mirror     Antiglare night position    With the electronic key in steering lock position 2  the  mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in  light sensitivity     With gear selector lever in position    R     or with the  interior lamp switched on  the mirror brightness does  not respond to changes in light sensitivity     Note     The automatic antiglare function does not react  if  incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the  inside rear view mirror   The automatic antiglare function will not react for  example  if the wind screen is installed     Warning     In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may  escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass  breaks     Electrolyte has an irritating effect  Do not allow the  liquid to come into contact with eyes  skin   clothing  or respiratory system  In cases it does   immediately flush affected area with water  and  seek medical help if necessary     J_A208 book Seite 78 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    79  Rear view mirrors    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Exterior rear view mirrors    The switch is located on the center console     Turn electronic key in steerin
102. Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Rear window defroster    Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2     To select  press F button     To cancel  press F button again     Notes     Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed  before activating the defroster     The rear window defroster consumes a large amount of  electrical power  To keep the battery drain to a  minimum  turn off the defroster as soon as the window  is clear     The defroster is automatically turned off after a  maximum of 12 minutes of operation     If several power consumers are turned on  simultaneously  or the battery is only partially charged   it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn  itself off  When this happens  the indicator lamp inside  the switch starts blinking     As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage  the  defroster automatically turns itself back on     Air distribution  T    Press b button for each side repeatedly until the  requested symbol is displayed     Press U button to return to automatic mode     Air volume    Press     or   side of rocker switch    until the  requested blower speed is attained  A choice of 7 blower  speeds is available     To switch the automatic climate control off  press     side  of rocker switch    until symbol OFF is displayed   I    The fresh air supply to the vehicle interior is shut off     While driving  use this setting only temporarily   otherwise the windshield could fog u
103. EMOVE KEY   malfunction  and warning messages                                             245  Replacing bulbs                                                               280  Replacing wiper blade insert                                        299  Reporting Safety Defects                                                  15  Residual engine heat utilization  REST                      125  Roadside assistance                                                           10  Roadside assistance call  See Tele Aid                                                                186  Roll bar  Switch                                                                            52  Warning lamp                                                             233  Roller blind  Horizontal                                                                    174  Vertical                                                                        175    S    Safety guidelines for the seat belt  emergency  tensioning retractor and airbag                                 73  Seat belts                                                                            58  Fastening                                                                       60  Seat belt nonusage warning system                          59  Unfastening                                                                   61  Warning lamp                                                             232  Seat belts and supplemental restraint  sy
104. Index    Driving instructions    Drive sensibly     save fuel    Fuel consumption  to a great extent  depends on driving  habits and operating conditions     To save fuel you should         keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures         remove unnecessary loads         allow engine to warm up under low load use         avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration         have all maintenance work performed at regular  intervals by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center     Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold  weather  in stop and go traffic  on short trips and in hilly  country     Drinking and driving    Pedals    Warning     Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be a very  dangerous combination  Even a small amount of  alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes   perceptions and judgement     The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is  sharply increased when you drink or take drugs  and drive     Please don   t drink or take drugs and drive or allow  anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs     Warning     Keep driver   s foot area clear at all times  Objects  stored in this area may impair pedal movement     J_A208 book Seite 205 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    206  Driving instructions    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Power assistance    Brakes    Excessive use of salt and other snow melting chemicals  spread on roads during t
105. Index    ENGINE OIL LEVEL    1  The engine oil level must be checked immediately  See Engine oil  level indicator on page 112    2  There is no oil in the engine  There is a danger of engine damage     3  There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter  The  engine oil level must be checked immediately  See Engine oil level  indicator on page 112     4  The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level   Check the engine oil level immediately  See Engine oil level  indicator on page 112 and check the engine for visible leakage  loss  of oil      5  The measuring system is malfunctioning     6  It may be that there is water in the engine oil  Have the engine oil  checked     When the    ENGINE OIL LEVEL     CHECK LEVEL     message appears while the engine is running and at  operating temperature  the engine oil level has dropped  to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick     When this occurs  the warning will first come on  intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops  further     If no oil leaks are noted  continue to drive to the nearest  service station where the engine oil should be topped to  the    full    mark on the dipstick with an approved oil     The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored   Extended driving with the symbol displayed could  result in serious engine damage that is not covered by  the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     Line 1  Line 2    ENGINE OIL LEVEL  CHECK LEVEL 1    ENGINE OIL LEVEL  STOP  ENGINE OFF 2  
106. Practical hints  Car care  Index    BRAKE LINING WEAR    When this message appears during braking  it indicates  that the brake pads are worn down     Have the brake system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     BRAKE FLUID    Line 1  Line 2    BRAKE LINING WEAR  VISIT WORKSHOP     Line 1  Line 2    BRAKE FLUID  VISIT WORKSHOP     Warning     Driving with this message displayed can result in  an accident  Have your brake system checked  immediately  Don   t add brake fluid before checking  the brake system  Overfilling the brake fluid  reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot  engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire  You  can be seriously burned     J_A208 book Seite 238 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    239  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    PARKING BRAKE    Parking brake  see page 204     ENGINE FAN    1  The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty  Observe coolant  temperature gauge while driving  see page 86     Line 1  Line 2    PARKING BRAKE  RELEASE BRAKE     Line 1  Line 2    ENGINE FAN  VISIT WORKSHOP 1    J_A208 book Seite 239 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    240  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    COOLANT  coolant level     When this message appears while
107. R 17 91 Y2  3  5    Spare wheel    Rim  light alloy   Wheel offset   71 2 J x 17 H 2  1 46 in  37 mm   71 2 J x 17 H 2  1 46 in  37 mm     Summer tire   Radial ply tire  225 45 R 17 91 W1  225 45 R 17 91 W1    J_A208 book Seite 315 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    316  Technical data    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Rims     Winter tires    Electrical system    Model  CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG    Rim  light alloy   Wheel offset  7 J x 16 H 2  1 46 in  37 mm   71 2 J x 17 H 2  1 46 in  37 mm     Winter tires   Radial ply tires  205 55 R 16 91 H M S  225 45 R 17 91 W M S    Model  CLK 320  CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG    Generator  alternator   14 V 115 A  14 V 150 A  14 V 150 A    Starter motor  12V 1 7 kW  12V 1 7 kW  12V 1 7 kW    Battery  12V 100 Ah  12V 100 Ah  12V 100 Ah    Spark plugs    Electrode gap  Tightening torque    Bosch F 8 DPER  Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2  NGK PFR 5 R 11  0 039 in  1 0 mm   15     22 ft lb  20     30 Nm     Bosch F 8 DPER  Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2  NGK PFR 5 R 11  0 039 in  1 0 mm   15     22 ft lb  20     30 Nm     NGK PFR 5 11    0 039 in  1 0 mm   15     22 ft lb  20     30 Nm     J_A208 book Seite 316 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    317  Technical data    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Weights  see certification tag     Main dimensions    Trunk load max   2
108. S      driver airbag  front passenger airbag  door  mounted side impact airbags      ETR     seat belt  emergency tensioning retractors   and front  seat knee bolsters  The system is designed to  enhance the protection offered to properly  belted occupants in certain frontal  front  airbags  and side  side impact airbags  impacts  which exceed preset deployment thresholds         Never wear belts over rigid or breakable  objects in or on your clothing  such as  eyeglasses  pens  keys etc   as these might  cause injuries         Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm   against your neck or off your shoulder  In a  crash  your body would move too far forward   That would increase the chance of head and  neck injuries  The belt would also apply too  much force to the ribs or abdomen  which  could severely injure internal organs such as  your liver or spleen         Position the lap belt as low as possible on your  hips and not across the abdomen  If the belt is  positioned across your abdomen  it could cause  serious injuries in a crash         Each seat belt should never be used for more  than one person at a time  Do not fasten a seat  belt around a person and another person or  other objects         Belts should not be worn twisted  In a crash   you wouldn   t have the full width of the belt to  manage impact forces  The twisted belt against  your body could cause injuries     J_A208 book Seite 62 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    63  Restraint systems    Technical  da
109. Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Transmission selector lever  manually unlocking    In the case of power failure the transmission selector  lever can be manually unlocked  e g  to tow the vehicle     To do so  insert a pin  1   e g  ball point pen  into the  covered opening below the position    D    of the shift  pattern  While pushing the pin down  move selector  lever from position    P        After removal of the pin from the opening  the cover will  not close fully  Only after moving the selector lever to  positions    D     and    D       does the cover return to its  closed position     J_A208 book Seite 279 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    280  Exterior lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Exterior lamps    Headlamp adjustment    Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important   Check and readjust headlamps at regular intervals and  when a bulb has been replaced     For adjusting headlamp aim see page 285     Replacing bulbs    Notes     To prevent a possible electrical short circuit  switch off  lamp prior to replacing a bulb     When replacing bulbs  install only 12 volt bulbs with  the specified watt rating     When replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass  portion of bulb with bare hands  Use plain paper or a  clean cloth     Warning     Bulbs and bulb holders ca
110. The magazine will be ejected  Remove the  magazine  Pull out the CD tray until its stop is reached  and place the CDs in the recess of the tray  label side up   Push the tray into the magazine in the direction shown  by the arrow  Insert the loaded magazine into the  changer     Important     Close the door after the magazine has been inserted     Playing CDs    Press the    CD    button  The CD most recently played will  start at the point where it was last switched off  CDs  stored in the magazine can be selected by using the  station preset buttons 1 6     The magazine slot number of  the selected CD will then be  displayed after    CD     The  number of the track being  played will be displayed after     TRACK        3    2    2    1    4    J_A208 book Seite 140 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    141  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    If there is no CD in the  selected magazine slot      NO CD    and the  corresponding slot number  will be displayed   e g    NO CD3      After the last track on a CD has been  played  the next CD will automatically be selected and  played     Skipping tracks forwards backwards    Press the  button  The next track on the CD will be  played     Press the  button  If the track has been playing for  more than 10 seconds  it will revert to the start of that  track  If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it  will revert to th
111. To prevent damage to the soft top  soft top compartment  cover  trunk lid or luggage cargo when lowering the  roof         load trunk only to the height of the luggage cover         do not permit luggage cargo to raise the closed  luggage cover         do not load anything on top of the luggage cover         do not place anything on the soft top compartment  cover         do not open the trunk lid while the soft top is being  raised or lowered  This is required since the soft top  compartment cover moves upward and backward  during raising or lowering operations         do not operate the luggage cover with the soft top  lowered  Doing so will result in damage to the  luggage cover or the soft top     Lowering a wet soft top can result in water reaching the  vehicle interior  The soft top should be dry when  lowering it into the soft top storage compartment     Do not lower a frozen soft top until thawed and dry   Doing so may result in damage not covered by the  Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     To prevent mildew  the soft top must be dry before  lowering it into the storage compartment     The soft top should not be lowered or raised at outside  temperatures below  5  F   15  C   since the material  becomes less pliable with lower temperatures     Notes     Rear passengers should lean forward while raising or  lowering the soft top  to clear the path of the rear  window     To prevent the soft top from being lowered  unintentionally while a trunk luggage carrier is  instal
112. USA or  Customer Service at 1 800 387 0100 in Canada     Notes     The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until  the call is concluded  Calls can only be terminated by a  Response Center or Customer Assistance Center  representative except Roadside Assistance and  Information calls  which can also be terminated by  pressing    button on the multifunction steering  wheel     When a Tele Aid call has been initiated  the audio  system or the COMAND system audio  only vehicles  with COMAND  is muted and the selected mode  radio   tape or CD  pauses  The optional cellular phone  if  installed  switches off  If you must use this phone  the  vehicle must be parked  Disconnect the coiled cord and  place the call  The navigation system  if engaged  will  continue to run  The display in the instrument cluster is  available for use and spoken commands are only  available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND  unit  A pop up window will appear in the COMAND  display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress     J_A208 book Seite 189 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    190  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Remote door unlock    In the case you have your vehicle locked unintentionally   e g  key inside vehicle   and the reserve key is not  handy  contact the Mercedes Benz Response Center at  1 800 756 9018  in the USA  or 1 888 923 8367  in  Canada   You will be
113. able         unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available  the use of leaded fuels will damage  the catalysts         gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating  and improper fuel can cause engine damage     Certain Mercedes Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program  For details   consult your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or write to     In the USA   In Canada   Mercedes Benz USA  LLC  European Delivery Department  One Mercedes Drive  Montvale  NJ 07645 0350    Mercedes Benz Canada  Inc   European Delivery Department  849 Eglinton Avenue East  Toronto  Ontario M4G 2L5    J_A208 book Seite 11 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    12  Introduction    We continuously strive to improve our product  and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make  changes in design and equipment  Therefore  information  illustrations and descriptions in this Operator   s Manual  might differ from your vehicle     Optional equipment is also described in this manual  including operating instructions wherever necessary  Since they  are special order items  the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your  vehicle     If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator   s Manual  your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures     The Operator   s Manual and Service
114. accomplish this by a combination of  adjustments to the seat and steering wheel  If  you have any problems  please see your  authorized Mercedes Benz Center         Do not lean with your head or chest close to the  steering wheel or dashboard         Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel  rim  Placing hands and arms inside the rim  can increase the risk and potential severity of  hand arm injury when the driver front airbag  inflates         Adjust the front passenger seat as far as  possible rearward from the dashboard when  the seat is occupied         Occupants  especially children  should never  lean their heads in the area of the door where  the side airbag inflates  This could result in  serious injuries or death should the airbag be  triggered  Always sit upright  properly use the  seat belts  and appropriate size infant or child  restraint system         Children 12 years old and under must never  ride in the front seat  except in a  Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmartTM  compatible child seat  which operates with the  BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to  deactivate the passenger front airbag when it  is properly installed  Otherwise they will be  struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash   If this happens  serious or fatal injury can  result     Failure to follow these instructions can result in  severe or fatal injuries to you or other occupants     J_A208 book Seite 72 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    73  Restraint systems    Technical  da
115. ag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    137  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Track search forwards backwards    Press the  button      SEEK FWD    will be shown on  the display and the track  search will run the tape  forwards to the start of the  next track     Press the  button      SEEK RWD    will be shown  on the display and the track  search will run the tape  backwards to the start of the  track currently playing  Track search can be interrupted  by pressing the same button again     Note     The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a  break of at least 4 seconds between tracks     Fast forward reverse    Press the  button      FORWARD    will appear on  the display and fast forward  will start     Press the  button      REWIND    will appear on the  display and fast reverse will  start     Fast forward reverse is stopped by pressing the same  button again  or it will stop automatically at the  beginning or the end of the tape  The track will  automatically change at the end or beginning of the tape  and play will begin     J_A208 book Seite 137 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    138  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Scanning    Press the    SC    key  Each track  on the cassette will be played  for 8 seconds in ascending  order     Note     T
116. ags plus  seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were  designed to operate  and do not afford any protection  whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not  designed to deploy     The SRS uses two crash severity levels  thresholds  to  activate either the emergency tensioning retractor  ETR   or front airbag or both  Activation depends on the  direction and severity of the impact exceeding the  preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened     Seat belt fastened        first threshold exceeded  ETR activates        second threshold exceeded  airbag also activates    Seat belt not fastened        first threshold exceeded   airbag activates  but not ETR    Driver and front passenger systems operate  independently of each other     J_A208 book Seite 65 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    66  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Emergency tensioning retractor  ETR     The seat belts for the front seats are equipped with  emergency tensioning retractors  These tensioning  retractors are located in each belt   s inertia reel and  become operationally ready with the electronic key in  steering lock position 1 or 2     The emergency tensioning retractors are designed to  activate only when the seat belts are fastened during  frontal impacts exceeding the first threshold of the SRS  and in rear impacts exceeding a preset severity level   They remove sla
117. and setting and memory location number   where appropriate     4 Station frequency     5 This only appears when    MEMORY    rather than     FREQUENCY    has been selected in the individual  setting menu    STATION SEARCH USING     See  page 106     The radio must be switched on     Press the    or    button repeatedly until  display  2  appears     Press button j or k repeatedly until the required  station or frequency is displayed     Use the j of k button to select a stored station or  station frequency  This depends on the selection made  in the    STATION SEARCH USING    setting menu     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system   P54 30 2936 27    J_A208 book Seite 93 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    94  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    CD player  optional   1 Audio system is switched off     2 The CD player is switched on     3 The number of the CD currently playing is displayed  if you are using a CD changer     4 Track number     The radio must be switched on     The CD player must be switched on     Press the    or    button repeatedly until  display  2  appears     Press the j or k button repeatedly until the  required track number  4  is displayed     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     Note     To select a CD from the magazine  only vehicles  equipped w
118. any breathing  difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the  airbag inflates  then get fresh air by opening a  window or door     Warning     To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags  inflate  it is very important for the driver and front  passenger to always be in a properly seated  position and to wear their seat belts     For maximum protection in the event of a collision  always be in normal seated position with your back  against the backrest  Fasten your seat belt and  ensure that it is properly positioned on your body     Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed  and force  a proper seating and hands on steering  wheel position will help to keep you at a safe  distance from the airbag  Occupants who are  unbelted  out of position or too close to the airbag  can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates  with great force in the blink of an eye     J_A208 book Seite 71 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    72  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index        Sit properly belted in an upright position with  your back against the backrest         Adjust the driver seat as far as possible  rearward  still permitting proper operation of  vehicle controls  The distance from the center  of the driver   s breastbone to the center of the  airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at  least ten inches  25 cm  or more  You should be  able to 
119. arage door opener    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Garage door opener    1 Signal transmitter keys    2 Indicator lamp    3 Portable remote control transmitter    The built in remote control is capable of operating up to  three separately controlled objects     Notes     Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible  with the integrated opener  If you should experience  difficulties with programming the transmitter  contact  your authorized Mercedes Benz Center  or call  Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center  in the USA  only  at 1 800 FOR MERCedes  or Customer Service  in  Canada  at 1 800 387 0100     1  2    3    Warning     When programming a garage door opener  the door  moves up or down     When programming or operating the remote  control make sure there is no possibility of anyone  being harmed by the moving door     J_A208 book Seite 158 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    159  Garage door opener    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    For operation in the USA only  This device complies  with Part 15 of the FCC Rules  Operation is subject to  the following two conditions      1  This device may not cause harmful interference  and     2  this device must accept any interference received   including interference that may cause undesired  operation     Any unauthorized mo
120. at is not activated  If the system is not  activated the indicator lamp in the    SOS    button stays  on after turning electronic key in starter switch to  position 2 and the message    TELE AID     NOT  ACTIVATED    will be shown in the multifunction display  for approx  10 seconds     If you have any questions regarding activation  please  call the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018  in the USA   or 1 888 923 8367  in Canada       Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand     The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response   automatic and manual emergency  roadside assistance  and information     The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the  vehicle   s battery is charged  properly connected  not  damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available     The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted  when using the volume control on the multifunction  steering wheel  for raising press button    and for  lowering press button        To activate  press the    SOS    button  the Roadside  Assistance button     or the Information button      depending on the type of response required     Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call   you will receive a user ID and password via first call  mail  By visiting www mbusa com and selecting    Tele  Aid     USA only   you will have access to account  information  remote door unlock  Info Services  profile  and more       Optional     available only with COMAND    System self check    Initially  after tur
121. auses  between wipes are automatically controlled by a  rain sensor monitoring the wetness of the  windshield      Notes     With switch in this position  one wipe occurs  when turning the electronic key in steering lock  from position 0  However  this might cause  scratches on a dry windshield  Turn combination  switch to Off position before turning the  electronic key in steering lock from position 0     Optional rain sensor   Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehicle  is taken to an automatic car wash or during  windshield cleaning  Wiper will operate in  presence of water spray at windshield  and wiper  may be damaged as a result     II Normal wiper speed    III Fast wiper speed    P54 25 2033 26  6    7    J_A208 book Seite 118 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    119  Hazard warning flasher    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Vehicles without rain sensor   If the vehicle is standing still  the wiper will switch back  to setting I  intermittent wiping     Windshield wiper smears    If the windshield wiper smears the windshield  even  during rain  activate the washer system as often as  necessary  The fluid in the washer reservoir should be  mixed in the correct ratio  see page 259     Blocked windshield wiper    If the windshield wiper becomes blocked  for example   due to snow   switch off the wiper     For safety reasons before removing ice or snow  remove  electronic
122. aximum effectiveness of the  ESP is only achieved with Mercedes Benz recommended  M S rated radial ply tires and or snow chains     Synchronizing ESP    If the power supply was interrupted  battery  disconnected or empty   the BAS ESP malfunction  indicator lamp may be illuminated with the engine  running     Turn steering wheel completely to the left and then to  the right  The BAS ESP malfunction indicator lamp  should go out     J_A208 book Seite 221 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    222  Driving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    ESP control switch    ESP control switch located on center console     To switch ESP off  press upper half of the switch     ESP warning lamp v  located in speedometer dial   comes on     To switch ESP on again  press lower half of the switch     ESP warning lamp v  located in speedometer dial   goes out     To improve the vehicle   s traction when driving with  snow chains  or starting off in deep snow  sand or gravel   switch off ESP by pressing the upper half of the ESP  switch  The ESP warning lamp v  located in the  speedometer dial  is continuously illuminated     With the ESP system switched off  the engine torque  reduction feature is cancelled  Therefore  the enhanced  vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable     Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  conditions     A portion of the ESP system remains active  ev
123. be operational     J_A208 book Seite 290 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    291  Emergency operation of soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Raising soft top manually    In case of malfunction  the power soft top can also be  raised manually  This procedure should be performed  with great care by two persons     We recommend to take off your watch or other jewelry to  prevent personal injury     A combination open end hex socket wrench in the  vehicle tool kit is required for this job     1  Engage parking brake     2  Lower windows and open doors     3  Lower roll bar with roll bar switch     Note     If the roll bar cannot be lowered  carefully guide the  soft top across the roll bar  Lift the rear window over  the roll bar     4  For safety reasons  remove electronic key from  steering lock     Important     Ensure that the trunk lid is closed while raising the soft  top manually  Otherwise there is the possibility of  contact between the trunk lid and the soft top  compartment cover     Warning     Do not place your hands near the roll bar  soft top  frame  upper windshield area or soft top storage  compartment or between the soft top rods while the  soft top is being raised and locked     Serious personal injury may occur     J_A208 book Seite 291 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    292  Emergency operation of soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Op
124. ble   see page 228     Function indicator lamp on the center console    Front passenger airbag automatically  switched off  see page 64     ABS    BRAKE    BAS  ESP    SRS    CHECK  ENGINE    J_A208 book Seite 84 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    85  Instrument cluster    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Activating instrument cluster display    The instrument cluster is activated by         Opening the door         Pressing button J  V or W on the instrument  cluster         Turning the electronic key in steering lock to  position 1 or 2         Switching on the exterior lamps     Display illumination    The display for temperature  odometer  multifunction  indicator  FSS indicator and clock is illuminated briefly  when opening the driver   s door     The display illumination brightness responds  automatically according to changes in the surrounding  light sensitivity     To briefly illuminate the display  with electronic key  removed or in steering lock position 0   press button J     Instrument lamps    Activate the instrument cluster     Press V or W button to vary intensity of instrument  lamps     J_A208 book Seite 85 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    86  Instrument cluster    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Coolant temperature gauge  3     During severe operating conditions an
125. case the engine cannot be started  vehicle   s battery is  in order   the system is not operational  Contact an  authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call 1 800 FOR   MERCedes  in the USA  or 1 800 387 0100  in Canada      General notes on the central locking system    If the electronic key is inserted in the steering lock  the  vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote  control     If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked         Aim transmitter eye at a receiver of either door  handle  Check the batteries of the electronic key  see  page 288  or synchronize the remote control  see  page 290         Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver   s door   To start the engine  insert the electronic key in the  steering lock  There could be a slight delay until the  electronic key can be turned in the steering lock     Important     When unlocking the driver   s door with the mechanical  key  the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will  sound     To cancel the alarm  insert the electronic key in the  steering lock or press button    or     on the  electronic key     J_A208 book Seite 26 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    27  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Central locking system    Radio frequency and infrared remote control    The electronic key has an integrated radio frequency  and infrared remote control     Due to the extended operatio
126. cation label  which is located on  the driver   s door pillar  see page 311     The trunk lid cannot be opened by the trunk lid release  switch or the electronic key when previously locked  separately with the mechanical key     J_A208 book Seite 37 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    38  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Notes     In case of a malfunction in the central locking system  the trunk can be unlocked individually     To unlock and open the trunk lid  turn mechanical key  to position 1  hold and push to open     If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened  see page 299     Important     Do not place mechanical key inside trunk  since trunk is  locked when the lid is closed if the vehicle has been  previously centrally locked     To prevent damage to the trunk lid and the soft top  compartment cover  do not open the trunk lid while the  soft top is being raised or lowered   Lower trunk lid using handle  1  and close it with hands  placed flat on trunk lid  Please remember to keep your  fingers out of the space between the lid and the vehicle     P88 50 2009 26    1    J_A208 book Seite 38 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    39  Trunk lamp    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Trunk lamp  If the trunk is to remain open for a long period of time   the trunk la
127. ccelerator pedal in kick down  position     The    W    mode helps to improve traction and  driving stability of the vehicle     The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle  and engine speeds than in the    S    program mode     1    J_A208 book Seite 202 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    203  Automatic transmission    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Caution     Never change the program mode when the selector lever  is out of position    P     It could result in a change of  driving characteristics for which you may not be  prepared     Important     Always be certain of the program mode selected since  the vehicle driving characteristics change with the  selection of the program mode     Dependent on the program mode selector switch  position    S    or    W    and the gear selector lever in  position    R     the ratio of power transmission changes     Emergency operation  Limp home mode     If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no  longer shifts  the transmission is most likely operating  in Limp home mode which engages when there is a  malfunction of the transmission  This condition may be  accompanied by the    CHECK ENGINE    malfunction  indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on     In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be  activated     To engage 2nd gear or reverse     1  Stop the vehicle     2  Move selector lever to position  
128. certain  systems and do not replace the driver   s responsibility to  maintain the vehicle   s operating safety by having all  required maintenance and safety checks performed on  the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized  Mercedes Benz Center to address the malfunction and  warning messages  See page 228     J_A208 book Seite 105 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    106  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Individual settings    R    8    J_A208 book Seite 106 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    107  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    1 Preliminary display of the individual settings    2    SET TIME HOURS      Only vehicles without COMAND     3    SET TIME MINUTES      Only vehicles without COMAND     4    12 24 HOURS        the unit set is displayed in the  instrument cluster   Only vehicles without COMAND     5    TEMP  INDICATOR        the unit set is displayed in  the outside temperature display in the instrument  cluster and in the automatic climate control display    6    DISPLAY VALUES IN        the unit set is displayed in  the trip and main odometer    7    TEXT        sets the language used in the  multifunction display    8    STATION SEARCH USING        radi
129. child seat manufacturer   s instructions     A child   s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  significantly increased if the child restraints are  not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  not properly secured in the child restraint     J_A208 book Seite 58 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    59  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Note     For cleaning and care of the seat belts  see page 306     Seat belt nonusage warning system    With the electronic key in steering lock position 2  a  warning sounds for a short time if the driver   s seat belt  is not fastened  See also seat belt warning lamp on  page 232     Warning     Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest  reclined  Sitting in an excessively reclined position  can be dangerous  You could slide under the seat  belt in a collision  If you slide under it  the belt  would apply force at the abdomen or neck  That  could cause serious or even fatal injuries  The  backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint  when the wearer is in an upright position and the  belt is properly positioned on the body     Warning     Failure to wear and properly fasten and position  your seat belt greatly increases your risk of  injuries and their likely severity in an accident   You and your passengers should always wear seat  belts     If you are ever in an accident  your injuries can be  considerably m
130. ck from the belts in such a way that the  seat belts fit more snugly against the body restricting its  forward movement as much as possible     In cases of other frontal impacts  angled impacts   roll overs  certain side impacts  or other accidents  without sufficient frontal or rear impact forces  the  emergency tensioning retractors will not be activated   The driver and passengers will then be protected by the  fastened seat belts and inertia reel in the usual manner     For seat belt and emergency tensioning retractor safety  guidelines see page 73     J_A208 book Seite 66 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    67  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Airbags    1 Driver airbag    The driver airbag is located in the steering wheel hub     2 Front passenger airbag    The passenger front airbag is located in the dashboard  ahead of the front passenger     1    SRS  AIRBAG  SRS  AIRBAG    2    J_A208 book Seite 67 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    68  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    3 Side impact airbag    The side impact airbags are located in the doors     The most effective occupant restraint system yet  developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt   In some cases  however  the protective effect of a seat  belt can be further enhance
131. cle stops or slows down  providing no  other system has been called up in the meantime     To return setting menus  4 to 8  to their factory settings         Call up the individual setting preliminary  display  1          Press the J button in the instrument cluster for  approximately 3 seconds  Display  9  will appear         Press the J button once more  the message     RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS    appears in the  display     The individual setting preliminary display  1  will  appear if you do not press the J button within  about 5 seconds  The setting menus will not be  reset     Setting the audio volume    You can only adjust the volume of the system currently  in use  The volume setting for each system  audio   telephone  navigation and voice recognition system  is  stored separately     Setting button        increases the volume        reduces the volume     J_A208 book Seite 108 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    109  Flexible service system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Flexible service system  FSS    service indicator     The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is  directly related to the operating conditions of the  vehicle     The symbol 9 or    appears together with a  message in the multifunction display prior to the next  suggested service  Depending on operating conditions  throughout the year  the next service is calculated and  displayed in days or
132. concerning Tele Aid  please visit  www mbusa com and use your ID and password  sent to  you separately  to learn more  USA only      Notes     The indicator lamp in the Information button     remains illuminated in red for approx  10 seconds  during the system self check after turning electronic  key in starter switch to position 2  together with the     SOS    button and the Roadside Assistance button          See system self check on page 182 when the indicator  lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than  approximately 10 seconds     If the indicator lamp in the Information button    is  illuminated continuously and there was no voice  connection to the Response Center established  then the    J_A208 book Seite 187 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    188  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call   e g  the relevant cellular phone network is not  available   The message    INFO     CALL FAILED    appears  in the multifunction display     Information calls can be terminated using the     button on the multifunction steering wheel     Important     If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after  pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated  in  red  at any time  the Tele Aid system has detected a fault  or the service is not currently active  and may not  initiate a call  Visit your Mercedes Benz Center a
133. conversion parts and accessories  explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model     We have tested these parts to determine their reliability  safety and their special  suitability for Mercedes Benz vehicles     We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible  for them  even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other  agencies should exist  Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety  performance  or reliability of your vehicle  Please do not use them     Mercedes Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available  at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information  also on  permissible technical modifications  and where proper installation will be performed     J_A208 book Seite 7 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    8  Introduction    Operator   s manual    This Operator   s Manual contains a great deal of useful information  We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize  yourself with the vehicle before driving     For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle  we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings  contained in this manual  Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others   Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     Your vehicle may have some
134. cy to give off coloring  e g  when wet  etc   may cause the upholstery to become permanently  discolored  By lining the seats with a proper  intermediate cover  contact discoloration will be  prevented     Leather Upholstery  Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry  thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved  Leather Care  Exercise particular care when cleaning  perforated leather as its underside should not become  wet     MB Tex Upholstery  Pour Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care onto soft  lint free cloth and apply with light pressure     Hard plastic trim items    Pour Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care onto soft  lint free cloth and apply with light pressure     Plastic and rubber parts    Do not use oil or wax on these parts     Wind screen    Use only water or mild detergent to clean the wind  screen     Rubber weatherstrip    The door and windshield header rubber weatherstrip  material should be cared for at regular intervals with a  silicon based car care product     J_A208 book Seite 307 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    308  Cleaning and care of the vehicle    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Soft top    Clean soft top with soft top raised and locked  Lower the  soft top into the storage compartment only if the soft top  is completely dry  If the soft top is kept in the storage  compartment for a lengthy period  raise it and air out  with the windows
135. d appears in the display     Note     Press the    button if you do not wish to make a call     The procedure is cancelled and display  1  appears     Press the    button when the required number or  name appears in the display  2    The telephone number  3  is dialed     Once dialing is completed the name  4  is displayed if  the name is stored in the telephone book  failing that  the number dialed will remain displayed  The display  remains for the duration of the call     Pressing the    button hangs up and display  1   appears     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     J_A208 book Seite 99 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    100  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Incoming call    The telephone must be switched on     1    CALL        you are being called    Press the    button to answer the call     Press the    button to hang up or if you do not wish  to answer the incoming call     J_A208 book Seite 100 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    101  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Navigation system  optional   1 The navigation system is switched off     2 The navigation system is switched on but no  destination has been specified     3 The navigati
136. d by an airbag     In conjunction with wearing the seat belts  the driver  and front passenger airbags can provide increased  protection for the driver and front passenger in certain  frontal impacts exceeding preset thresholds  Door    mounted side impact airbags can provide increased  protection to belted front passengers on the impacted  side of the vehicle in side impacts exceeding its preset  threshold     Important     The operational readiness of the airbag system is  verified by the indicator lamp    SRS    in the instrument  cluster when turning the electronic key in steering lock  to position 1 or 2  If no fault is detected  the lamp will go  out after approximately 4 seconds  after the lamp goes  out  the system continues to monitor the components  and circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a  malfunction by coming on again  If the lamp does not  come on at all or if it fails to extinguish after  approximately 4 seconds or if it comes on thereafter   a malfunction in the system has been detected     The following system components are monitored or  undergo a self check  crash sensor s   airbag ignition  circuits  front seat belt buckles  emergency tensioning  retractors  seat sensor     3    P91 60 2122 26    J_A208 book Seite 68 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    69  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Initially  when the electronic key is t
137. d by pressing  the SND key a second time  The last dialed telephone  number is shown on the display  Using the        or  button  the numbers stored in the re dial  memory of the telephone can be selected     The abbreviation L and the  number in the memory are  shown in the top line of the  display     J_A208 book Seite 144 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    145  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Accepting incoming call in telephone mode    With an incoming call  the ringing tone will be heard  and the message    CALL    appears in the display  Press  the SND key to answer the call     Accepting incoming call in tape  CD or radio mode    If the telephone is activated in the background   telephone symbol in the display   then a switch is made  automatically to telephone when an incoming call is  received  The audio source is muted  the ringing tone is  heard and the message    CALL    appears  After the call  has been terminated  the previously selected audio  source is resumed     Terminating call    A current call can be terminated by pressing the END  key     Component malfunctions    The radio  CD changer1  and Mercedes Benz integrated  cellular telephone1 are part of a fiberoptic networked  system  Failure of one of the components can lead to  malfunctions of the other components  Please contact  your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call  1 800 FOR MERCedes 
138. d copying  even of excerpts  is not permitted without our prior  authorization in writing     Title illustration no  P00 00 2729 26    Press time 05 18 01  GSP SIP  Printed in Germany    Warning     To help avoid personal injury  be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs  Improper  or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its  equipment  which may in turn result in personal injury     If you have any question about carrying out some service  turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz  Center     J_A208 book Seite 341 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    Order No  6515 1244 13 Part No  208 584 29 83 USA Edition A 2002    J_A208 book Seite 342 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    Please observe the following   BOOKSPINE for Operator   s Manual    5 8 in  1 6 cm   3 5 in  8 9 cm     208 A  Operator   s Manual CLK Class Cabriolet    Please ensure the correct position of model code and model name    
139. d lock the  vehicle  Do not leave children unattended in the  vehicle  or with access to an unlocked vehicle   Children could move the gear selector lever from  position    P     which could result in an accident or  serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 197 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    198  Automatic transmission    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Selector lever position    The current selector lever position is indicated in the  gear range indicator display  The automatic gear  shifting process can be adapted to specific operating  conditions using the selector lever     Park position    The park position is to be used when parking the  vehicle  Engage only with the vehicle stopped   The park position is not intended to serve as a  brake when the vehicle is parked  Rather  the  driver should always use the parking brake in  addition to placing the selector lever in park to  secure the vehicle     Note     The electronic key can only be removed from the  steering lock with the selector lever in  position    P     With the electronic key removed  the  selector lever is locked in position    P        With a malfunction in the vehicle   s electrical  system the selector lever could remain locked in  position    P     To unlock the selector lever  manually  see page 279     Reverse gear    Shift to reverse gear only with the vehicle  stopped     10    J_A208 book Seite
140. d restraint  system may use vehicle equipment and may cause  serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 76 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    77  Adjusting telescoping steering column    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Adjusting telescoping steering column  Unlocking   Pull handle  1  out to its stop  The indicator lamp   located in the instrument cluster  comes on     Adjusting   To lengthen or shorten the steering column  pull out or  push in steering wheel     Locking   Push handle  1  in until it engages  The indicator lamp   located in the instrument cluster  goes out     Important     With the electronic key in steering lock position 2  the  indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on   It should go out when the engine is running     If the indicator lamp does not go out after starting the  engine  the adjustable steering column is not locked  properly     Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked  the steering column     Warning     Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving   The telescoping adjustment must be locked while  driving  Adjusting the steering wheel while  driving  or driving without the telescoping  adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose  control of the vehicle     1    P46 10 2020 26    J_A208 book Seite 77 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    78  Rear view mirrors    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  
141. d stop and go city  traffic  the coolant temperature may rise close to the red  marking     The engine should not be operated with the coolant  temperature in the red zone  Doing so may cause  serious engine damage which is not covered by the  Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     Outside temperature indicator  5     The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper  area  Due to its location  the sensor can be affected by  road or engine heat during idling or slow driving  This  means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature  can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer  placed next to the sensor  not by comparison to external  displays  e g  bank signs etc       Adaptation to ambient temperature takes place in steps  and depends on the prevailing driving conditions  stop   and go or moderate  constant driving  and amount of  temperature change     Warning         Driving when your engine is badly overheated  can cause some fluids which may have leaked  into the engine compartment to catch fire  You  could be seriously burned         Steam from an overheated engine can cause  serious burns and can occur just by opening  the engine hood  Stay away from the engine if  you see or hear steam coming from it     Turn off the engine  get out of the vehicle and do  not stand near the vehicle until it cools down     Warning     The outside temperature indicator is not designed  to serve as an Ice Warning Device and is therefore  unsuitable for that purpose  Indicated  t
142. d the light go out while the restraint is  installed  please check installation  If the light  remains out  do not use the BabySmartTM restraint  to transport children on the front passenger seat  until the system has been repaired     Warning     If the warning lamp does not go out after starting  the engine  or if it comes on while driving  then the  roll bar system is not operating properly and may  not activate in an accident  In this case  raise the  roll bar manually  see page 53  before continuing  to drive     J_A208 book Seite 233 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    234  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Malfunction and warning messages in the  multifunction display    Malfunction and warning messages for the following  systems will be displayed immediately in the  multifunction display     These messages can be cleared from the instrument  cluster by         using the J button on the instrument cluster  or        pressing button j  k     or    on the  multifunction steering wheel     They are then stored in the malfunction message  memory  See page 104     Notes     Certain malfunction and warning messages are  accompanied by an audible signal   Malfunction and warning messages in red are always  accompanied by an audible signal     Temporary messages such as    SWITCH OFF LIGHTS     will not be stored in the malfunction message memory  
143. dification to this device could void  to the user   s authority to operate the equipment     Programming or reprogramming the integrated  remote control     1  Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1  or 2     2  Hold the end of the hand held transmitter of the  device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches   5 cm to 12 cm  away from the surface of the  integrated remote control located on the inside rear  view mirror  keeping the indicator lamp in view     3  Using both hands  simultaneously push the hand   held transmitter button and the desired integrated  remote control button  Do not release the buttons  until completing step 4     4  The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control  will flash  first slowly and then rapidly  When the  indicator lamp flashes rapidly  both buttons may be  released  the rapid flashing lamp indicates  successful programming of the new frequency  signal   To program the remaining two buttons   follow steps 1 though 4     Note     If after repeated attempts  you do not successfully  program the integrated remote control device to learn  the signal of the hand held transmitter  the garage door  opener could be equipped with the    rolling code  feature        J_A208 book Seite 159 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    160  Garage door opener    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Rolling code programming     To train a garage door op
144. dren too big for child restraint systems must  ride in back seats using regular seat belts  Position  shoulder belt across chest and shoulder  not face or  neck  A booster seat may be necessary to achieve  proper belt positioning     J_A208 book Seite 63 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    64  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system    Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats  designed  for use with the Mercedes Benz system and available at  any authorized Mercedes Benz Center are required for  use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system     With the special child seat properly installed  the  passenger front airbag will not deploy  The 7  indicator lamp located on the center console will be  illuminated  except with electronic key removed or in  steering lock position 0  The system does not deactivate  the door mounted side impact airbag     BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp     Warning     The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will  ONLY work with a special child seat designed to  operate with it  It will not work with child seats  which are not BabySmartTM compatible     Never place anything between seat cushion and  child seat  e g  pillow   since it reduces the  effectiveness of the deactivation system  The  bottom of the child seat must make full contact  with the passenger seat cushion  A
145. e a safety enhancement to  the other features designed into the vehicle  No system  in any vehicle can eliminate the possibility of serious  injury or fatality in an accident  Properly fastened seat  belts and child restraints must be used     Notes     If the warning lamp in the switch comes on  then a  malfunction has been detected  In this case  drive only  with the roll bar raised until the problem has been  corrected  Raise the roll bar by pressing the upper half  of the roll bar switch     Have the system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     Items being transported in the rear passenger  compartment should be placed in such a manner as not  to affect the movement of the roll bar when being  raised     P91 59 2001 26    1    2    J_A208 book Seite 53 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    54  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Backrest    1 Release lever    Folding forward   Lift release lever  1  and fold backrest forward  The seat  will automatically slide forward and the head restraint  will move down     Folding back   Lift release lever  1  and fold backrest back  The seat  and head restraint return to their previous positions     To interrupt the procedure  activate the power seat  switch     Notes     The automatic seat slide is provided with a safety  feature  The automatic process is interrupted  if the  backrest of the sliding 
146. e oil level  Checking                                                              112  256  Warning                                                                       244  ENGINE OIL LEVEL   malfunction  and warning messages                                              244  Engine oil level indicator                                                112  ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOT WHEN ENGINE ON   measuring    multifunction indicator                     113  Engine oils                                                                       320  Capacities                                                                    318  ESP  Electronic stability program       211  213  220  278  Control switch                                                            222  Malfunction and warning messages                       245  Malfunction indicator lamp                                      231  Synchronizing                                                            221  Warning lamp                                                             231  Express opening and closing  See Power windows                                                    147    J_A208 book Seite 329 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    330  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Exterior lamp malfunction  and warning message                                               242  Exterior lamp switch                        
147. e preceding track  To skip several tracks   the respective button must be pressed until the desired  track is reached  If the beginning or end of the CD is  reached during the search  the first or last track will be  played     Fast forward reverse    Press the  button and hold it down for audible fast  forward     Press the  button and hold it down for audible  reverse     The search will stop when the  button is released  The  relative time of the track will  be displayed during the  search  The search mode will  cancel if the beginning or end of the CD is reached     Scanning    Press the SC key  Each track will be played for 8 seconds  in ascending order  The search will stop at the track in  question if the           buttons or the     SC    key is pressed     J_A208 book Seite 141 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    142  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Random play repeat function    The tracks of the current CD are played in random order  when the random feature  RDM  is selected  Press the  RDM key to switch on  and press RDM again to switch  off     When the repeat function   RPT  has been selected  a  particular track can be played  for as many times as desired   Press the RPT key to switch  on  and press RPT again to switch off     Note     Both functions cannot be used simultaneously     Direct track selection    Tracks can be selected directly using the
148. e the system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     See page 218 for notes on the antilock brake system   ABS      BAS  ESP    ABS    J_A208 book Seite 231 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    232  Malfunction and indicator lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Telescoping steering column     indicator lamp    The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster  comes on with the electronic key in steering  lock position 2 and should go out with the  engine running     If the indicator lamp does not go out after starting the  engine  the adjustable steering column is not properly  locked     For locking the adjustable telescoping steering column   see page 77     Seat belt warning lamp    With the electronic key in steering lock  position 2  the seat belt warning lamp comes  on and a warning sounds for approx   6 seconds if the driver   s seat belt is not fastened     Malfunction and indicator lamps in the  center console    AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp    The 7 indicator lamp will light up for approx   6 seconds when you turn the electronic key in steering  lock to position 1 or 2     The 7 indicator lamp stays lit as long as a  BabySmartTM compatible child seat is properly installed  on the front passenger seat  It indicates that the front  passenger airbag is switched off     See page 64 for BabySmartTM deactivation system     BabySmartTM is a trademar
149. e trip odometer and main odometer  by  pressing button    or    on the multifunction  steering wheel until the display appears  See page 92     Press button j or k until the FSS indicator  appears     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     Important     The FSS indicator does not include an engine oil level  indicator  See page 112 for engine oil level indicator     Notes     When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or more  days at a time  such days will not be counted  Any such  days not counted by the FSS can be added by your  Mercedes Benz Center     The interval between services is determined by the type  of driving for which the vehicle is used  For example   driving at extreme speeds  and cold starts combined  with short distance driving in which the engine does not  reach operating normal temperature  reduce the interval  between services     J_A208 book Seite 110 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    111  Flexible service system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Following a completed A or B service the  Mercedes Benz Center sets the counter mileage to  10 000 miles  Canada  15 000 km      The counter can also be set by any individual  To do so     Turn the electronic key in steering lock to position 2     To call up the trip odometer and main odometer  press  button    or    on the multifunction steering  wheel until the display appears  S
150. echnical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Locking and unlocking with remote control    Unlocking     Press transmit button     All turn signal lamps blink  once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked     The remote control can be programmed for two kinds of  unlocking modes  see below      Selective unlocking mode      Press transmit button    once to unlock driver   s door  and fuel filler flap   Press transmit button    twice to unlock both doors   fuel filler flap  and trunk     Global unlocking mode      Press transmit button    once to unlock both doors   fuel filler flap  and trunk     Notes     If the trunk was previously locked separately  it will  remain locked  see page 37     The presently active unlocking mode  selective or  global  can only be determined by unlocking the vehicle  with the remote control  see below for changing mode      If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the remote  control  neither door nor trunk is opened  the electronic  key is not inserted in the steering lock  or the central  locking switch is not activated  the vehicle will  automatically lock     Locking     Press transmit button     once  All turn signal lamps  blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked     If they do not blink three times  a door or trunk is not  properly closed     Note     If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing  the transmit button  then it may be 
151. ed  gasoline  can be used     These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements  such as resistance to spark knock  boiling range  vapor  pressure etc      J_A208 book Seite 321 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    322  Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc     Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Gasoline additives    A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon  build up caused by gasoline  Mercedes Benz  recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing  additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits     After an extended period of using fuels without such  additives  carbon deposits can build up especially on the  intake valves and in the combustion area  leading to  engine performance problems such as         warm up hesitation         unstable idle         knocking pinging         misfire         power loss     Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel   They only result in unnecessary cost  and may be  harmful to the engine operation     Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel  quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not  covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     Coolants    The engine coolant is a mixture of water and  anticorrosion antifreeze  which provides         corrosion protection         freeze protection         boiling protection  by increasing the boiling point      The cooling system was filled at the fac
152. edes Benz Limited Warranty     J_A208 book Seite 308 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    309  Contents     Technical data    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Technical data    Spare parts service                          310  Warranty coverage                           310  Identification labels                         311  Layout of poly V belt drive              312  Technical data                                  313  Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc       capacities                                     318  Engine oils                                       320    Engine oil additives                       320  Air conditioner  refrigerant                                  320  Brake fluid                                       320  Premium unleaded  gasoline                                        321  Fuel requirements                          321  Gasoline additives                          322  Coolants                                           322  Consumer information                  324    J_A208 book Seite 309 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    310  Technical data    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Spare parts service    All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock  of original spare parts required for maintenance and  repair work  In addition  strategically located
153. ee page 92     Press button j or k until the FSS indicator  appears     Press button J on the instrument cluster for  approximately 4 seconds     The multifunction display will show the question      DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTERVAL       CONFIRM BY PRESSING R       Press button J on the instrument cluster again for  approximately 4 seconds  and hold until a signal  sounds  The message    SERVICE INTERVAL HAS BEEN  RESET    appears in the multifunction display     The new service indicator is displayed with the reset  distance of 10 000 miles  Canada 15 000 km      If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset  have a  Mercedes Benz Center correct it     However you choose to set your reference numbers  the  scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet  must be followed to properly care for your vehicle     J_A208 book Seite 111 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    112  Engine oil level indicator    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Engine oil level indicator    To check the engine oil level  park vehicle on level  ground  with engine at normal operational temperature     Check oil level approximately 5 minutes after stopping  the engine  allowing for the oil to return to the oil pan     Turn the electronic key in steering lock to position 2     To call up the trip odometer and main odometer  press  button    or    on the multifunction steering  wheel until the display appea
154. eering lock  position 1 or 2     10 Instrument cluster  see page 82    11 Voice recognition system switch  see separate  operating instructions    12 Steering lock with ignition starter  switch  see page 192    13 Center air outlets  adjustable    14 Air volume control for center air outlets    15 Left front seat heater switch  see page 56    16 Headlamp washer switch  see page 116    17 Roll bar switch  see page 53  Roll bar warning lamp  see page 233    18 Hazard warning flasher switch  see page 119    19 Central locking switch  see page 35    20 Switch for tow away alarm  see page 44  Indicator lamp for antitheft alarm system  see  page 43    21 Right front seat heater switch  see page 56    22 Automatic climate control  see page 120  Rear window defroster switch  see page 124    23 Glove box  illuminated with electronic key in  steering lock position 1 or 2   see page 151    24 Audio system  see page 127    25 Storage compartment    26 Ashtray with lighter  see page 154    J_A208 book Seite 19 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    20  Instruments and controls    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Center console  1 Soft top switch  see page 162    2 ESP control switch  see page 222    3 Program mode selector switch  see page 202    4 Left power window switch  front   see page 146    5 Right power window switch  front   see page 146    6 Left power window switch  rear   see page 14
155. el on wheel hub  Insert wheel bolts and  tighten them slightly     To avoid paint damage  place wheel flat against hub  and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt     Unscrew the alignment bolt  1  to install the last  wheel bolt     Lower vehicle  Remove jack and insert jack tube cover     11  Using the wrench  tighten the five bolts evenly   following the sequence illustrated  until all bolts are  tight   Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft lb   110 Nm      12  Ensure proper tire pressure     P40 10 2483 26    3  4    2  5    P40 10 2484 26    J_A208 book Seite 269 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    270  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Notes     Before storing the jack  the jack arm must be lowered  almost to the base of the jack     For proper storage of vehicle jack see page 261     Warning     Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or  rusted     Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts     Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired  immediately     Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened  mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off   This could cause an accident  Be sure to use the  correct mounting bolts     Warning     The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only  Use  for over a total of 12 000 miles  20 000 km    aggregate of all uses  may cause wheel rim failure  leading to an accident and possible injuries     CLK 320 wit
156. el spin and loss of control     The    Resume    function should only be operated if  the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed  and wishes to resume this particular preset speed     J_A208 book Seite 215 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    216  Driving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Notes     If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently  while driving on a downgrade  the speed you set on the  cruise control may be exceeded  In this case the  automatic transmission shifts down  max  to 3rd gear   to maintain the set cruise control speed by using the  engine   s braking power     As soon as the grade eases  the automatic transmission  shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position     Nevertheless  in some cases you may have to step on the  brake pedal to slow down  In this case the cruise control  is switched off     Use the lever to resume the previously set speed     Brake assist system  BAS     The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle   s braking  capability during emergency braking maneuvers by  having maximum power boost applied to the brakes  more quickly in emergency braking conditions than  might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver   s  braking style  This can help reduce braking distances  over what ordinary driving and braking style might do   The BAS complements the antilock brake system  ABS      Warning     BAS cann
157. emperatures just above the freezing point do not  guarantee that the road surface is free of ice     J_A208 book Seite 86 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    87  Instrument cluster    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Trip odometer  9     To reset to    0    miles km     Activate the instrument cluster if it is not already  activated by pressing the J button on the instrument  cluster     Press button    or    on the multifunction  steering wheel repeatedly until the trip odometer  appears if it is not displayed  See page 92     Press button J on the instrument cluster to reset trip  odometer     Tachometer  13     The red marking on tachometer denotes excessive  engine speed     Avoid this engine speed  as it may result in serious  engine damage that is not covered by the  Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     To help protect the engine  the fuel supply is interrupted  if the engine is operated within the red marking     J_A208 book Seite 87 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    88  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    J_A208 book Seite 88 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    89  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  D
158. en with  the switch in the OFF position     If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin  the  brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient  traction  The traction control engages at vehicle speeds  up to approximately 24 mph  40 km h   and switches off  at 50 mph  80 km h      P54 25 2037 26    Warning     When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated  continuously  the ESP is switched off     Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  conditions     J_A208 book Seite 222 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    223  Driving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Note     Avoid spinning of one drive wheel  This may cause  serious damage to the drive train which is not covered  by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     The ESP warning lamp  located in the speedometer dial   starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires  lose traction and the wheels begin to spin     To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by  ESP  press lower half of the switch  the ESP warning  lamp in the speedometer dial goes out      Important     If the ESP warning lamp flashes         during take off  apply as little throttle as possible         while driving  ease up on the accelerator     Warning     ESP should not be switched off during normal  driving other than in circumstances described  above  Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle  stability in standard
159. ener  or other rolling code  devices  with the rolling code feature  follow these  instructions after completing the    Programming     portion of this text   A second person may make the  following training procedures quicker and easier      1  Locate training button on the garage door opener  motor head unit  Exact location and color of the  button may vary by garage door opener brand  If  there is difficulty locating the transmitting button   reference to garage door opener operator   s manual     2  Press    training    button on the garage door opener  motor head unit  which activated the    training  light         Note     Following step 2  there are 30 seconds to initiate  step 3     3  Firmly press and release the programmed  integrated remote control transmit button  Press  and release same button a second time to complete  the training process   Some garage door openers  may requires you to do this procedure a third time  to complete the training      4  Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the  programmed button on the integrated remote  control transmitter     Canadian programming     During programming  your hand held transmitter may  automatically stop transmitting  Continue to press and  hold the integrated remote control transmitter button   note steps 2 through 4 in the    Programming    portion   while you press and re press     cycle     your hand held  transmitter every two seconds until the frequency  signal has been learned  The indicator lamp w
160. ep it in  a safe place     J_A208 book Seite 129 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    130  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Entering the code number    Switch on the radio     CODE    will appear on the display   Using the buttons on the alpha numeric keypad  enter  the five digit code  Confirm by pressing the    OK    key     If an incorrect code has been entered and confirmed      CODE    will reappear on the display  The correct code  must be entered once again     If an incorrect code is entered  three times     WAIT    will  appear on the display and the  radio will be locked out for  about 10 minutes     Note     The lock out time will only count down if the radio is left  switched on     Button and soft key operation    In these instructions  the alpha numeric keypad  right  side of radio face  and the function buttons  left side of  the radio face  are referred to as    buttons    and the four  keys under the display are referred to as    soft keys        Note     Do not press directly on the radio display face     J_A208 book Seite 130 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    131  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Operation    Switching on and off    Press the control knob       The radio is switched off when the ignition key is turned  to position 0 or 
161. er seats and head  restraints are no longer adjusted automatically     To resynchronize the adjustment feature  turn  electronic key in steering lock to position 2  move the  seat completely forward and the head restraint fully  down  and hold respective buttons for approx   2 seconds     J_A208 book Seite 49 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    50  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Important     Prior to operating the vehicle  the driver should adjust  the seat height for proper vision as well as fore aft  placement and backrest angle to insure adequate  control  reach  operation  and comfort  The head  restraint should also be adjusted for proper height  See  also airbag section on page 67 for proper seat  positioning     In addition  also adjust the steering wheel to ensure  adequate control  reach  operation  and comfort     Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be  adjusted for adequate rearward vision     Fasten seat belts  Infants and small children should be  seated in a properly secured restraint system that  complies with U S  Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  Standard 213     All seat  head restraint  steering wheel  and rear view  mirror adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts  should be done before the vehicle is put into motion     Warning     Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  t
162. er the cover  See below for instructions on initiating  an emergency call manually     Once the emergency call is in progress  the indicator  lamp in the    SOS    button will begin to flash  The  message    EMERGENCY CALL     CONNECTING CALL     appears in the multifunction display  When the  connection is established  the message    EMERGENCY  CALL     CALL CONNECTED    appears in the  multifunction display  All information relevant to the  emergency  such as the location of the vehicle   determined by the GPS satellite location system    vehicle model  identification number and color are  generated     A voice connection between the Response Center and  the occupants of the vehicle will be established  automatically soon after the emergency call has been  initiated  When a voice connection is established the  audio system mutes and the message    TELE AID      EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE    appears in the  multifunction display  The Response Center will attempt  to determine more precisely the nature of the accident  provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle     J_A208 book Seite 183 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    184  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    The Tele Aid system is available if         it has been activated and is operational  Activation  requires a subscription for monitoring services and  cellular air time         the relevant cellular phone net
163. eration  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    5  Unlock soft top storage compartment     Open trunk lid with mechanical key and lift  protection cover     Using screwdriver  supplied in vehicle tool kit   turn  screw two turns counterclockwise     Close trunk lid     Important     Do not place mechanical key inside trunk  since trunk is  locked again when closing the lid     6  Place open end wrench  1   supplied in vehicle tool  kit  on bolt between backrest and soft top  compartment cover  Turn wrench  1  in direction of  arrow to its stop and remove     P65 10 2009 26    1    P77 30 2031 26    J_A208 book Seite 292 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    293  Emergency operation of soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    7  Open soft top compartment cover  2  and place in  upright position     Place hands from below on upper section of soft  top  3  and pull hard to move soft top  4  out of its  storage compartment     8  Move soft top toward windshield header  arrow      2    4    3    P77 30 2029 26    Warning     Do not place your hands in areas marked X   Serious personal injury may occur     P77 30 2034 26    J_A208 book Seite 293 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    294  Emergency operation of soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    9  D
164. es Benz Limited Warranty     The message    MEASURING NOT POSSIBLE    will be  displayed if a proper oil level check cannot be  performed  The engine oil level check can be repeated  after a short time     Perform the engine oil level check with the dipstick  if it  cannot be completed via the multifunction display   See page 256     In this case we recommend that you have the system  checked at a Mercedes Benz Center     Note     See malfunction and warning messages on page 234  and page 244 if an engine oil level indicator appears on  the multifunction display when the engine is running     The engine oil level cannot be checked while the engine  is running  The    ENGINE OIL LEVEL     NOT WHEN  ENGINE ON    message will appear     Engine oil consumption    Engine oil consumption checks should only be made  after the break in period  During the break in period   higher oil consumption may be noticed and is normal   Frequent driving at high engine speeds results in  increased consumption     J_A208 book Seite 113 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    114  Exterior lamp switch    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Exterior lamp switch    D Off    C Parking lamps  also side marker lamps  taillamps   license plate lamps  instrument panel lamps   Canada only  When the engine is running  the low  beam is additionally switched on     B Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam  headlamps  co
165. ess button  arrow   Unhook luggage cover from  holders  2  and guide luggage cover with handle  1  into  storage compartment until handle  1  locks in place     Important     To prevent damage to soft top or luggage cargo when  lowering the roof         load trunk only to the height of the luggage cover         do not permit luggage cargo to raise the closed  luggage cover         do not load anything on top of the luggage cover         do not operate the luggage cover with the soft top  lowered  Doing so will result in damage to the  luggage cover or the soft top     Note     Opening and closing of the soft top can only be done  with the luggage cover and trunk lid closed     P65 10 2007 26    J_A208 book Seite 251 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    252  Fuses    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Fuses    Before replacing a blown fuse  determine the cause of  the short circuit     Spare fuses are supplied inside the main fuse box  1    Observe amperage and color of fuse     A special fuse puller is supplied with the vehicle tools     Always use a new fuse for replacement  Never attempt to  repair or bridge a blown fuse     A fuse chart can be found inside the corresponding fuse  box cover     Fuse box in engine compartment    1 Main fuse box in engine compartment    To gain access to the main fuse box  1   press clamp   arrow   lift the fuse box cover up and remove it     To close
166. etractors for the front seat belts   dual front airbags  door mounted side impact airbags  and knee bolsters for driver and front passenger  Their  protective functions are designed to complement one  another     Seat belts    Important     Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require  seat belt use     All states and provinces require use of child restraints  that comply with U S  Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  Standard 213     All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in  vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap   shoulder belt     For your safety and that of your passengers we strongly  recommend their use     Warning     Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  the front seat  except in a Mercedes Benz  authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat   which operates with the BabySmartTM system  installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger  side front airbag when it is properly installed   Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it  inflates in a crash  If this happens  serious or fatal  injury will result     According to accident statistics  children are safer  when properly restrained in the rear seating  positions than in the front seating positions   Infants and small children must ride in back seats  and be seated in an appropriate infant or child  restraint system  which is properly secured with  the vehicle   s seat belt  fully in accordance with the  
167. evice complies  with Part 15 of the FCC Rules  Operation is subject to  the following two conditions      1  This device may not cause harmful interference  and     2  this device must accept any interference received   including interference that may cause undesired  operation     Any unauthorized modification to this device could void  to the user   s authority to operate the equipment     Mechanical keys    The mechanical keys work only in the driver   s door   trunk  and storage compartment locks     Notes     The mechanical key does not operate the central locking  system or antitheft alarm system     The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with  the mechanical key     P80 35 2035 26    1    J_A208 book Seite 32 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    33  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Doors    1 Opening     pull handle    2 Unlocking driver   s door    3 Locking driver   s door    4 Individual door from inside         Push lock button down to lock         Pull inside door handle to unlock     Important     The mechanical key does not operate the central locking  system or antitheft alarm system     When you lock the driver   s door with the mechanical  key  the door lock button should move down     The passenger door must be locked with the door lock  button     the driver   s door can only be locked when it is  closed     1  1  2  3    J_A20
168. explosive  Keep flames or  sparks away from battery  avoid improper  connection of jumper cables  smoking etc      Read all instructions before proceeding     J_A208 book Seite 274 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    275  Jump starting    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Proceed as follows     1  Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that  the jumper cables will reach  but never let the  vehicles touch  Make sure the jumper cables do not  have loose or missing insulation     2  On both vehicles         Turn off engine and all lights and accessories   except hazard warning flashers or work lights         Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to  position    P        Important     3  Clamp one end of the first jumper cable to the  positive     under hood terminal of the discharged  battery and the other end to the positive     terminal  of the charged battery  Make sure the cable clamps  do not touch any other metal parts     4  Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the  grounded negative       terminal of the charged  battery and the final connection to the negative        terminal  2  of the discharged battery     Important     5  Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery  and run at high idle  Make sure the cables are not  on or near pulleys  fans  or other parts that move  when the engine is started  Allow the discharged  battery to charge for a
169. f water     Storing mirror positions in memory    The exterior rear view mirror positions are stored in  memory with the seat head restraint position and can  be recalled when necessary  see page 48     Warning     In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may  escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass  breaks     Electrolyte has an irritating effect  Do not allow the  liquid to come into contact with eyes  skin   clothing  or respiratory system  In cases it does   immediately flush affected area with water  and  seek medical help if necessary     J_A208 book Seite 80 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    81  Rear view mirrors    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Parking position    The passenger side exterior mirror can be adjusted and  programmed to assist the driver during parking  maneuvers  e g  to observe the curb or other objects  close to the vehicle      With electronic key in steering lock position 2  and the  exterior rear view mirror switch in the passenger side  position  the passenger side mirror will be turned  downward when placing the gear selector lever in    R     Reverse     The passenger side mirror position can now be adjusted  as desired     At speeds above approx  6 mph  10 km h   upon shifting  gear selector lever from    R    Reverse  or upon pressing  the driver   s side mirror button  the passenger side  mirror will return to its previous position
170. failure of any of these components are  indicated by the    CHECK ENGINE    malfunction  indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and are  simultaneously stored in the SFI control module     If the    CHECK ENGINE    malfunction indicator lamp  comes on  have the system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     With some exceptions  the control module switches off  the    CHECK ENGINE    malfunction indicator lamp if the  condition  causing the lamp to come on  no longer exists  during three consecutive cycles  See also page 230 for  fuel cap placement warning     An on board diagnostic connector is located in the  passenger compartment near to the parking brake  pedal  allowing the accurate identification of system  malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble  codes     CHECK  ENGINE    J_A208 book Seite 228 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    229  Malfunction and indicator lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Brake warning lamp    Except Canada    Canada only    When the brake warning lamp and message appear  while the engine is running  this means         there is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir   engine running and parking brake released   or        the parking brake is set  engine running      Note     If you find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid  reservoir is reached  have the brake system checked for  brake pad
171. for more information in the event  of a malfunction     1  Optional equipment    J_A208 book Seite 145 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    146  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Power windows    Power window switches are located on center console     1 left  front    2 left  rear    3 right  front    4 right  rear    Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2     Press switch in to resistance point     k to open    j to close    Release switch when window is in desired position     Warning     When closing the windows  be sure that there is no  danger of anyone being harmed by the closing  procedure     In case of obstruction  the automatic reversal will  not operate if a window is being closed by pressing  the switch to its resistance point and holding it  there  or when using the remote control     The closing procedure can be immediately reversed  by either pressing the switch k or pressing  button    on the remote control  and holding it     When leaving the vehicle  always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  and lock the  vehicle  Do not leave children unattended in the  vehicle  or with access to an unlocked vehicle   Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause  serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 146 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    147  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operati
172. for their suitability in  our engines  Therefore  use only engine oils  recommended by Mercedes Benz  Information on  recommended brands is available at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center     Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for  scheduled oil changes  Failure to do so could result in  engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz  Limited Warranty     Engine oil additives    Do not blend oil additives with engine oil  They may be  harmful to the engine operation     Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil  additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited  Warranty     Air conditioner refrigerant    R 134a  HFC  refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil  is used in the air conditioner system     Never use R 12  CFC  or mineral based lubricating oil   otherwise damage to the system will occur     Brake fluid    During vehicle operation  the boiling point of the brake  fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of  moisture from the atmosphere  Under extremely hard  operating conditions  this moisture content can lead to  the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing  the system   s efficiency     The brake fluid must therefore be replaced every two  years  preferably in the spring     It is recommended to use only brake fluid approved by  Mercedes Benz  Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center  will provide you with additional information     J_A208 book Seite 320 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    321  Fuels  coolants  lubrica
173. fter you have pressed the emergency  button  Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a  safe location  The Response Center will  automatically contact local emergency officials  with the vehicle   s approximate location if they  receive an automatic    SOS    signal and cannot make  voice contact with the vehicle occupants     J_A208 book Seite 185 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    186  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Roadside Assistance button        Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside  Assistance button      Pressing and holding the  button  for longer than 2 seconds  will initiate a call to a  Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher  The  button will flash while the call is in progress  The  message    ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE     CONNECTING  CALL    will appear in the multifunction display  When  the connection is established  the message    ROADSIDE  ASSISTANCE     CALL CONNECTED    appears in the  multifunction display  The Tele Aid system will transmit  data generating the vehicle identification number   model  color and location  subject to availability of  cellular and GPS signals      A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance  dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be  established  When a voice connection is established the  audio system mutes and the message    TELE AID      ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE    appears i
174. g lock to position 2     First select the mirror to be adjusted     press button       Left mirror     amp  Right mirror    To adjust  toggle the switch forward  backward or to  either side     With the electronic key in steering lock position 2  the  driver   s side mirror reflection brightness responds to  changes in light sensitivity     With gear selector lever in position    R     or with the  interior lamp switched on  the driver   s side mirror  brightness does not respond to changes in light  sensitivity     Notes     The exterior mirrors have electrically heated glass  The  heater switches on automatically  depending on outside  temperature     If an exterior mirror housing is forcibly pivoted from its  normal position  it must be repositioned by applying  firm pressure until it snaps into place     Warning     Exercise care when using the passenger side  mirror  The passenger side exterior mirror is  convex  outwardly curved surface for a wider field  of view   Objects in mirror are closer than they  appear  Check your inside rear view mirror or  glance over your shoulder before changing lanes     J_A208 book Seite 79 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    80  Rear view mirrors    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Important     Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle  paint finish can only be completely removed while in  their liquid state  by applying plenty o
175. gin to open after approx  1 second     To interrupt opening procedure  release transmit  button     To close     Continue to press transmit button     after locking  the vehicle     The windows begin to close after approx  1 second     To interrupt closing procedure  release transmit button     Note     If the windows cannot be operated automatically by  pressing the transmit button of the remote control then  it may be necessary to change the batteries in the  electronic key  if ok  battery check lamp in electronic  key will light briefly when pressing transmit button   or  to synchronize the remote control  see page 288  and 290     Warning     Never operate the windows if there is the  possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening  or closing procedure     In case the procedure causes potential danger  the  procedure can be immediately halted by releasing  the remote control button  To reverse direction of  movement press    for opening or     for  closing     J_A208 book Seite 31 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    32  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Panic button    To activate press and hold button  1  for at least one  second  An audible alarm and blinking exterior lamps  will operate for approximately 3 minutes     To deactivate press button  1  again  or insert electronic  key in steering lock     Note     For operation in the USA only  This d
176. h Sport Package  CLK 430   CLK 55 AMG     The dimensions of the spare wheel are different  from those of the road wheels for the rear axle   CLK 320 with Sport Package  The dimensions of  the spare wheel are different from those of the road  wheels   As a result  the vehicle handling  characteristics change when driving with a spare  wheel mounted on the rear axle     The spare wheel should only be used temporarily   and replaced with a regular road wheel as quick as  possible     J_A208 book Seite 270 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    271  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Tire inflation pressure    A table  see fuel filler flap  lists the tire inflation  pressures specified for Mercedes Benz recommended  tires as well as for the varying operating conditions     Important     Tire pressure changes by approx  1 5 psi  0 1 bar  per  18  F  10  C  of air temperature change  Keep this in  mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage      especially in the winter     Example     If garage temperature   approx   68  F   20  C  and  ambient temperature   approx   32  F  0  C  then the  adjusted air pressure   specified air pressure  3 psi    0 2 bar      Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values  offering high driving comfort  Increased inflation  pressures for heavy loads produce favorable handling  characteristics with lighter loads and are perfectl
177. h inspection  Damaged  areas need to be reundercoated     Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax   base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for  the lifetime of the vehicle  Post production treatment is  neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz  because of the possibility of incompatibility between  materials used in the production process and others  applied later     We have selected car care products and compiled  recommendations which are specially matched to our  vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology   You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care  products at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center     Warning     Many cleaning products can be hazardous  Some  are poisonous  others are flammable  Always follow  the instructions on the particular container   Always open your vehicle   s doors or windows when  cleaning the inside     Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed  for cleaning your vehicle     J_A208 book Seite 302 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    303  Cleaning and care of the vehicle    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Scratches  corrosive deposits  corrosion or damage due  to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed  or repaired with the car care products recommended  here  In such cases it is best to seek aid at your  authorized Mercedes Benz Center     The following topics deal with
178. he automatic climate control only operates with the  engine running     The temperature selector should be left at the desired  temperature setting  The temperature selected is  reached as quickly as possible     The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a  higher or lower temperature     The automatic climate control removes considerable  moisture from the air during operation in the cooling  mode  It is normal for water to drip on the ground  through ducts in the underbody     The desired interior temperature can be selected  separately for the left and right side of the passenger  compartment     Note     If the individual settings  page 106  of the outside  temperature display is switched from   C to   F or vice  versa  the automatic climate control returns to the  factory settings  Set temperature and activate S  mode     J_A208 book Seite 121 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    122  Automatic climate control    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Display and controls    Press the desired button to activate  indicator lamp is on  while activated     U Automatic mode    f Raise temperature    g Lower temperature    P Defrost    O Air recirculation    F Rear window defroster    b Air distribution  manual    S Economy mode       Air volume  manual    T Residual engine heat utilization    Basic setting   automatic mode    Press left and right U button for automatic mode
179. he beginning of a track can only be located if there is a  break of at least 4 seconds between tracks     Scan will be interrupted if the           buttons or the    SC    key is pressed     Dolby NR1  noise reduction system     To enable optimum  reproduction of cassettes  recorded using the Dolby B  system  press the    AUD    key  followed by the NR key so the     NR    in the display is not highlighted  To turn off  Dolby B noise reduction  press the    NR    key so the    NR     in the display is highlighted     1  Dolby and the double D symbol    are trademarks of Dolby  Laboratories Licensing Corporation  The Dolby noise reduction  system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories  Licensing Corporation     J_A208 book Seite 138 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    139  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    CD mode    General notes on CD mode    Should excessive temperatures occur while in CD mode      TEMP HIGH    will appear in the display and muting  will take place  The unit will then switch back to radio  mode until the temperature has decreased to a safe  operating level     Should temperatures occur while in CD mode which are  too low     TEMP LOW    will be displayed  but the CD will  play  It will be sensitive to skipping if you are driving  over rough roads     Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during  playback     Avoid fingerprints
180. he front seat  except in a Mercedes Benz  authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat   which operates with the BabySmartTM system  installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger  side front airbag when it is properly installed   Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it  inflates in a crash  If this happens  serious or fatal  injury can result     According to accident statistics  children are safer  when properly restrained in the rear seating  positions than in the front seating positions   Infants and small children must ride in back seats  and be seated in an appropriate infant or child  restraint system  which is properly secured with  the vehicle   s seat belt  fully in accordance with the  child seat manufacturer   s instructions     A child   s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  significantly increased if the child restraints are  not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  not properly secured in the child restraint     J_A208 book Seite 50 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    51  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Front head restraints    Removal     Tilt the backrest rearward for easier removal of the front  head restraints     Push button  1  up to bring the power adjustable head  restraint to its highest position     Pull out head restraint completely with both hands     Installation     Push button  1  of the power adjustable head 
181. he winter months may cause a  build up of moisture or residue to form on the braking  components  This build up or residue could cause light  corrosion of the braking components if the vehicle is  parked with the brakes cold  Apply steady and even  braking pressure when stopping the vehicle to warm up  and dry the brake components     Important     Please pay attention to the function of the brake assist  system  BAS   see page 216     The condition of the parking brake system is checked  each time the vehicle is in the shop for the required  maintenance service at an authorized Mercedes Benz  Center     If the parking brake is released and the brake warning  lamp in the instrument cluster stays on  the brake fluid  level in the reservoir is too low     Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the  reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir     Have the brake system inspected at an authorized  Mercedes Benz Center immediately     Warning     When the engine is not running  the brake and  steering systems are without power assistance   Under these circumstances  a much greater effort is  necessary to stop or steer the vehicle     Warning     After driving in heavy rain for some time without  applying the brakes or through water deep enough  to wet brake components or salty road conditions   the first braking action may be somewhat reduced  and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to  obtain expected braking effect  Be sure to maintain  a safe distance from vehicles 
182. henever wheels are mounted     For rim and tire specifications  refer to    Technical Data      page 314      Warning     Worn  old tires can cause accidents  If the tire tread  is badly worn  or if the tires have sustained  damage  replace them     When replacing rims  use only genuine  Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the  particular rim type  Failure to do so can result in  the bolts loosening and possibly an accident     J_A208 book Seite 262 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    263  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Rotating wheels    CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG   Wheel rotation applies only when winter tires are  mounted on all four wheels     The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of  tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel     Rotating  however  should be carried out as  recommended by the tire manufacturer  before the  characteristic tire wear pattern  shoulder wear on front  wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels  becomes  visible  as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate     Important     Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow  on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward  movement     Notes     Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels any time  you rotate the wheels or wash the vehicle underside     The use of retread tires is not recommended  Retread  tires may adversely affect the ha
183. hings in  the vehicle                                   250  Luggage cover                                  250  Fuses                                                 252  Hood                                                  254  Checking engine oil level              256  Automatic transmission  fluid level                                    257  Coolant level                                    257  Adding coolant                            258    Windshield washer   headlamp  cleaning system                         259  Windshield and headlamp  washer fluid mixing ratio         259  Spare wheel  vehicle tools   storage compartment                260  Vehicle jack                                      261  Wheels                                             262  Tire replacement                        262  Rotating wheels                          263  Spare wheel                                     264  Changing wheels                            266  Tire inflation pressure                   271  Battery                                              272    Jump starting                                   274  Towing the vehicle                          276  Exterior lamps                                 280  Headlamp assembly                    281  Taillamp assemblies                   283  Adjusting headlamp aim                285  Changing batteries in  the electronic key                      288  Synchronizing remote  control                                          290  Ra
184. icle door locks from locking   deactivate the automatic central locking     Emergency unlocking in case of accident    The doors unlock automatically a short time after a  strong deceleration is detected  such as in a collision   this is intended to aid rescue and exit      Driving on rough roads may cause the vehicle to unlock   If necessary  the vehicle can be locked again with the  central locking switch  see page 35     J_A208 book Seite 36 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    37  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Trunk    When the trunk is separately locked  it remains locked  when centrally unlocking the vehicle     To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk   lock it separately with the mechanical key  Leave only  the electronic key less its mechanical key with the  vehicle     Notes     The mechanical key does not operate the central locking  system or antitheft alarm system     When unlocking the trunk with the mechanical key  the  exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound     To cancel the alarm  insert the electronic key in the  steering lock or press button    or     on the  electronic key     0 Neutral position     push to open  arrow     1 Unlocking    2 Separate locking of trunk     remove mechanical key  in this position  only vehicles built prior 09 01    The vehicle production date  e g  09 01  can be  found on the certifi
185. icle is at standstill     J_A208 book Seite 89 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    90  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    1 Multifunction steering wheel    2 Multifunction display    Turn the electronic key in steering look to position 1  or 2     Press button     3    for next system    4    for previous system    5 j for next display in system    6 k for previous display in system    7    to increase the volume    8    to decrease the volume    9    to dial a telephone number  see page 96    See page 100 for instructions on answering an  incoming call     10    to end a call    10    0    40    60    80    60    40    mph    20km h  20    100    120    140    160    80    100    VDO    180    200    220    240    160  120  140    9  9    TEL    OFF  RESUME    1    2    3    4    5  6  7  8    10    1    3    4    5  6  8  7    9    10    J_A208 book Seite 90 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    91  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Press the    or    button repeatedly until the  required system is displayed     Pressing the    button advances the display to the  next system     Pressing the    button returns the display to the  previous system     You may call up additional display
186. igh temperature roller bearing grease   approx  2 1 oz  60 g  each    Brake system   MB Brake fluid  DOT 4    approx  0 5 US qt  0 5 l     Cooling system   MB Anticorrosion antifreeze   CLK 320  CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG  approx  9 5 US qt  9 0 l   approx  11 7 US qt  11 1 l     J_A208 book Seite 318 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    319  Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc    capacities    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Windshield washer system   MB Windshield washer concentrate    S    1   approx  7 4 US qt  7 0 l     Fuel tank  including a reserve of   Premium unleaded gasoline   Posted Octane 91  Avg  of 96 RON 86 MON      approx  16 4 US gal  62 0 l   approx  2 1 US gal  8 0 l     Air conditioner system   R 134a refrigerant and special  PAC lubricant  Never R 12      1  Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate    S    and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate    S    and  commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing  Follow suggested mixing ratios  see  page 259     Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc   Model  Capacity    J_A208 book Seite 319 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    320  Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc     Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Engine oils    Engine oils are specifically tested 
187. ignition is    on    and the engine is turned  manually     If you see flames  steam or smoke coming from the  engine compartment  or if the coolant temperature  gauge indicates that the engine is overheated  do  not open the hood  Move away from vehicle and do  not open the hood until the engine has cooled  If  necessary  call a fire department     J_A208 book Seite 254 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    255  Engine compartment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    To open     To unlock the hood  pull release lever  1  under the  driver   s side of the instrument panel  At the same time a  handle will extend out of the radiator grill  it may be  necessary to lift the hood up slightly      Caution     To avoid damage to the windshield wiper or hood  open  the hood only with wiper in the parked position     Pull handle  2  to its stop out of radiator grill and open  hood  do not pull up on handle      To close     Lower hood and let it drop into lock from a height of  approx  1 ft   30 cm   assisting with hands placed flat on  edges of hood  3      To avoid hood damage  please make sure that hood is  fully closed  If not  repeat closing procedure  Do not  push down on hood to attempt to fully close it     P88 40 2025 26    1    P88 40 2017 26    3    2    3    J_A208 book Seite 255 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    256  Engine compartment    Technical  data  Instruments  and contro
188. ill flash  slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon  successful training     J_A208 book Seite 160 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    161  Garage door opener    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Operation of remote control     1  Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1  or 2     2  Select and press the appropriate button to activate  the remote controlled device  The integrated remote  control transmitter continues to send the signal as  long as the button is pressed     up to 20 seconds     Erasing the remote control memory     1  Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1  or 2     2  Simultaneously holding down the left and right side  buttons for approximately 20 seconds  or until the  control lamp blinks rapidly  will erase the codes of  all three channels     J_A208 book Seite 161 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    162  Soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Soft top    A minimum height clearance of 6 1 2 ft   2 m  is  required to lower or raise the soft top     The raising or lowering procedure can only be started  with the luggage cover  page 250  and trunk lid closed     The raising or lowering procedure is immediately  interrupted by releasing the soft top switch     Do not operate the soft top while a trunk luggage carrier  is installed     
189. in front     Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause  excessive and premature wear of the brake pads     It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby  significantly reducing their effectiveness  It may  not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time  to avoid an accident     J_A208 book Seite 206 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    207  Driving instructions    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    All checks and service work on the brake system should  be carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center     Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by  Mercedes Benz     Caution     When driving down long and steep grades  relieve the  load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use  the engine   s braking power  This helps prevent  overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear     After hard braking  it is advisable to drive on for some  time  rather than immediately parking  so the air stream  will cool down the brakes faster     Driving off    Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after  driving off  Perform this procedure only when the road  is clear of other traffic     Warm up the engine smoothly  Do not place full load on  the engine until the operating temperature has been  reached     When starting off on a slippery surface  do not allow one  drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP  switched off  Doing so 
190. in the soft top switch lights  up     Notes     If indicator lamp blinks slowly  a malfunction  has occurred in the system     If indicator lamp blinks rapidly  the trunk lid  and or the luggage cover may be open  and need  to be closed         The side windows lower         The roll bar lowers  when in the upper position          The soft top compartment cover unlocks and  opens         The soft top is raised from its storage  compartment to the closing position         The soft top storage compartment closes and the  rear window section of the soft top lowers     a  signal sounds     Warning     To prevent possible accidents  drive the vehicle  only with the soft top either completely closed and  locked  or fully lowered into its storage  compartment     J_A208 book Seite 166 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    167  Soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    5  Press lock button  1  and fold down locking  handle  2      6  Turn locking handle 90   clockwise and pull soft top  frame carefully down until it meets the windshield  header attachment points     Turn locking handle counterclockwise to the stop to  lock the soft top     Fold locking handle up until it locks in place     The indicator lamp in the soft top switch goes out      the lowering procedure is completed     If the soft top switch is held or is released and pressed  again within approximately 2 seconds  the side 
191. in the steering lock  position 0 for an extended period of time  it can no  longer be turned in the lock  In this case  the  steering is locked  To unlock  remove electronic key  from steering lock and reinsert     J_A208 book Seite 276 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    277  Towing    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    The rear towing eye is located at the right  below the  bumper  The front towing eye is located on the  passenger side behind a cover in the bumper panel     CLK 320  except Sport Package      Cover removal   Insert finger in recess of cover and pull cover out     Cover installation   Engage cover at bottom and press in top securely     CLK 320 with Sport Package  CLK 430  CLK 55 AMG     Cover removal   Hold left and right end of grille and pull out     Cover installation   Engage left and right end of grille and press in securely     P88 20 2026 26  P88 20 2027 26    J_A208 book Seite 277 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    278  Towing    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    We recommend that the vehicle be transported using  flat bed equipment  This method is preferable to other  types of towing     The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground  and the selector lever in position    N    for distances up to  30 miles  50 km  and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph   50 
192. ing lock to  position 1 or 0  or remove electronic key from steering  lock  Press tow away alarm switch  1   The indicator  lamp  2  illuminates briefly     Exit vehicle  and lock vehicle with the remote control     The tow away alarm remains switched off until the  vehicle is locked again with the remote control  at which  time it is automatically reactivated     J_A208 book Seite 44 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    45  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Power seats  front    To operate the front power seat adjustment switches   turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2   with the driver   s or passenger   s door open  the power  seats can also be operated with the electronic key  removed or in steering lock position 0      Warning     Do not adjust the driver   s seat while driving   Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the  driver to lose control of the vehicle     Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest  reclined  Sitting in an excessively reclined position  can be dangerous  You could slide under the seat  belt in a collision  If you slide under it  the belt  would apply force at the abdomen or neck  That  could cause serious or even fatal injuries  The  backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint  when the wearer is in an upright position and the  belt is properly positioned on the body     Never place hands under seat or near an
193. ing points must also be checked   Use only belts installed or supplied by an  authorized Mercedes Benz Center         Do not pass belts over sharp edges         Do not make any modification that could  change the effectiveness of the belts         Airbags and ETR   s are designed to function on  a one time only basis  An airbag or emergency  tensioning retractor  ETR  that was activated  must be replaced     J_A208 book Seite 73 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    74  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    When you sell the vehicle we strongly urge you to give  notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with  an    SRS    by alerting him to the applicable section in the  Operator   s Manual         No modifications of any kind may be made to  any components or wiring of the    SRS     This  includes changing or removing any component  or part of the    SRS     the installation of  additional trim material  badges etc  over the  steering wheel hub  front passenger airbag  cover  or front door trim panels  and  installation of additional electrical electronic  equipment on or near    SRS    components and  wiring  Keep area between airbags and  occupants free of objects  e g  packages   purses  umbrellas  etc           An airbag system component within the  steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has  inflated  Do not touch         Improper work on the system 
194. ion and only one indicator  lamp will stay on     Turning off seat heater     If one indicator lamp is on  press upper half of switch     If both indicator lamps are on  press lower half of  switch     If left on  the seat heater automatically turns off after  approximately 30 minutes of operation     P54 25 2036 26    1    2    J_A208 book Seite 56 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    57  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Notes     When in operation  the seat heater consumes a large  amount of electrical power  It is not advisable to use the  seat heater longer than necessary     The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too  many power consumers are switched on at the same  time  or if the battery charge is low  When this occurs   the indicator lamp in the switch will blink  both  indicator lamps blink during rapid seat heating mode    The seat heaters will switch on again automatically as  soon as sufficient voltage is available     If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to  you  the seat heaters can be switched off     J_A208 book Seite 57 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    58  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Seat belts and integrated restraint system    Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts for all seats   emergency tensioning r
195. ion will not activate if the battery  charge level is insufficient     To cancel     Press T button     The system will automatically shut off        if you turn electronic key in steering lock to  position 2         after approx  30 minutes         if the battery voltage drops     J_A208 book Seite 125 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    126  Automatic climate control    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Dust filter    Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out  before outside air enters the passenger compartment  through the air distribution system     Note     Keep the air intake grille in front of windshield free of  snow and debris     Important     This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner system  that uses R   134a  HFC  hydrofluorocarbon  as a  refrigerant  Repairs should always be performed by a  qualified technician  and refrigerant should be collected  in a recovery system for recycling     J_A208 book Seite 126 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    127  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Audio and telephone  operation    These instructions are intended to help you become  acquainted with your Mercedes Benz vehicle radio   They contain useful tips and a detailed description of  the user functions     The right to correct errors and make technical a
196. irmly  depressed before the shift lock will release     Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the  engine is idling normally and the service brake is  applied  Do not release the brake until ready to drive   The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the  selector lever is in drive or reverse position     Important     After selecting any driving position from    N    or    P      wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before  accelerating  especially when the engine is cold     Accelerator position    Partial throttle   early upshifting   normal acceleration    Full throttle   later upshifting   rapid acceleration    Kickdown  depressing the accelerator beyond full  throttle    downshifting to a lower gear   maximum  acceleration  Once the desired speed is attained  ease up  on the accelerator     the transmission shifts up again     Warning     It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of    P     or    N    if the engine speed is higher than idle speed   If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal  the  vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in  reverse  You could lose control of the vehicle and  hit someone or something  Only shift into gear  when the engine is idling normally and when your  right foot is firmly on the brake pedal     J_A208 book Seite 196 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    197  Automatic transmission    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  
197. ise and remove  Pull  off electrical connector  5 or 6   Unhook clamping ring  and remove bulb     Insert new bulb  seating properly in cutouts of bulb  socket   mount clamping ring  Reinstall and push  electrical connector on securely     Reinstall cover  2 or 3      Xenon  optional   Bulb for low beam    Turn signal lamp  1156 NA  26 9 5 W 32 4 cp bulb     Open hood     Twist bulb socket  4  counterclockwise and pull out   Push bulb into socket  turn counterclockwise and  remove     Insert new bulb in socket  push in and twist clockwise   Reinstall bulb socket  Reinstall lamp assembly until  properly seated     Parking and standing lamp  H 6W  6 W bulb     Open hood     Rotate cover  3  counterclockwise and remove     Twist bulb socket  7  counterclockwise and pull out   Push bulb into socket  turn counterclockwise and  remove     Insert new bulb in socket  push in and twist clockwise   Reinstall bulb socket  Reinstall lamp assembly until  properly seated     Reinstall cover  3      Warning     Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps  it is  dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp  and its components  We recommend that you have  such work done by a qualified technician     J_A208 book Seite 282 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    283  Exterior lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Taillamp assemblies    Open trunk lid     Swing cover aside  bulbs 1  2 and 3      1 Tur
198. ising soft top manually              291  Antenna                                            298  Manual release for  fuel filler flap                              299  Replacing wiper blade insert        299    J_A208 book Seite 249 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    250  First aid kit    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    First aid kit    The first aid kit is stored in the left trunk well     Shelf below rear window    Stowing things in the vehicle    Luggage cover    1 Handle    2 Holder    To close compartment     Pull out on handle  1  to the stop and guide luggage  cover into left and right holders  2      Warning     The shelf below the rear window should not be  used to carry objects  This will avoid such objects  from being thrown about and injuring vehicle  occupants during an accident or sudden maneuver     The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects     Warning     To help avoid personal injury during a collision or  sudden maneuver  exercise care when stowing  things  Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if  possible  Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than  the seat backs  Do not place anything on the shelf  below the rear window     J_A208 book Seite 250 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    251  Luggage cover    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    To open compartment     Pr
199. ission fluid     Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and  changes are not required  For this reason the dipstick is  omitted     If you notice fluid leaks or gear shifting malfunctions   have your authorized Mercedes Benz Center check the  transmission fluid level     Coolant level    To check the coolant level  the vehicle must be parked  on level ground and the engine stopped     Check coolant level only when coolant is cold     The coolant level should reach the black top part of the  reservoir     P20 30 2032 26    J_A208 book Seite 257 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    258  Engine compartment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Adding coolant    If coolant has to be added  a 50 50 mixture of water and  MB anticorrosion antifreeze should be added     The drain plugs for the cooling system are located on  the right side of the engine block and at the bottom of  the radiator     Anticorrosion antifreeze mixture  see page 323     Warning     In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury         Use extreme caution when opening the hood if  there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking  from the cooling system  or if the coolant  temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is  overheated         Do not remove pressure cap on coolant  reservoir if engine temperature is above 194  F   90  C   Allow engine to cool down before  removing cap  The coolant reservoi
200. it is supported  by the jack  Keep hands and feet away from the area  under the lifted vehicle  Always firmly set parking  brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with  jack     Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is  raised  Be certain that the jack is always vertical  when in use  especially on hills  Always try to use  the jack on level surface  Be sure that the jack arm  is fully inserted in the jack tube  Always lower the  vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before  working under the vehicle     J_A208 book Seite 261 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    262  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Wheels    Replace rims or tires with the same designation   manufacturer and type as shown on the original part   See your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further  information     See your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for  information on tested and recommended rims and tires  for summer and winter operation  They can also offer  advice concerning tire service and purchase     Tire replacement    Front tires should be replaced in sets  Rims and tires  must be of the correct size and type  For dimensions   see    Technical Data     page 314      We recommend that you break in new tires for approx   60 miles  100 km  at moderate speed     It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be  fastened to a tightening torque of 80 ft lb   110 Nm   w
201. itch    1 Low beam  exterior lamp switch position B     2 High beam  exterior lamp switch position B     3 High beam flasher  high beam available  independent of exterior lamp switch position     4 Turn signals  right    5 Turn signals  left    To signal minor directional changes  such as changing  lanes on a highway  move combination switch to the  point of resistance only and hold it there     To operate the turn signals continuously  move the  combination switch past the point of resistance  up or  down   The switch is automatically canceled when the  steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree     Turn signal failure    If one of the turn signals fails  the turn signal indicator  system flashes and sounds at a faster than normal rate     P54 25 2034 26    2    3    4    4    5    5    1    J_A208 book Seite 117 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    118  Combination switch    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    6 Control for windshield wiper washer system     Push briefly for single wipe without adding washer  fluid  use only when windshield is wet      Push past detent and hold to activate wiper and  washer     Notes     The windshield washer reservoir  hoses and nozzles are  automatically heated     See page 259 for refilling windshield washer headlamp  cleaning system     7 Windshield wiper    0  Wiper off    I  Intermittent wiping   optional rain sensor  One initial wipe  p
202. ith CD changer   press a number on the  audio system or the  optional  COMAND system key pad  located in the center dashboard     J_A208 book Seite 94 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    95  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Cassette player  1 Audio system is switched off     2 The cassette player is switched on     3 Side being played     The radio must be switched on     The cassette player must be switched on     Press the    or    button repeatedly until  display  2  appears     Pressing the j button fast forwards on to the next  track     Pressing the k button rewinds the cassette to the  beginning of the current track     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     Notes     To select the reverse side of the tape  press button below  track number on the audio system display  or enter  request on the  optional  COMAND system located in  the center dashboard   To eject the inserted tape  press    EJ    on the audio  system  see page 135  or    EJT    on the  optional   COMAND system     J_A208 book Seite 95 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    96  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Telephone    Telephone book    1 The telephone is switched off     2 The
203. iving  this indicates a failure in  the parking lamp  taillamp  stop lamp  or low beam  headlamp  See page 280 for instructions on replacing  bulbs     If an exterior lamp fails  the message will appear only  when that lamp is switched on     If a brake lamp fails  the message will appear when  applying the brake and stays on until the engine is  turned off     Note     If additional lighting is installed  e g  auxiliary  headlamps etc   be certain to connect into the fuse  before the failure indicator monitoring unit order to  avoid damaging the system     Line 1  Line 2    LAMP DEFECTIVE  CHECK LAMPS     DISPLAY DEFECTIVE  VISIT WORKSHOP     J_A208 book Seite 242 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    243  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    LIGHT SENSOR    With the electronic key removed and the driver   s door  open  a warning sounds and the message    SWITCH OFF  LIGHTS     appears in the multifunction indicator if the  vehicle   s exterior lamps  except standing lamps  are not  switched off     STEER  WHEEL ADJUST     For locking the adjustable telescoping steering column   see page 77     Line 1  Line 2    STEER  WHEEL ADJUST     J_A208 book Seite 243 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    244  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  
204. k of Siemens Automotive Corp     J_A208 book Seite 232 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    233  Malfunction and indicator lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Roll bar warning lamp    The roll bar warning lamp is located in the roll bar  switch in the center console  Roll bar switch see  page 52     With the electronic key in steering lock position 2  the  roll bar warning lamp comes on and should go out with  the engine running     With the engine running and the roll bar lowered  the  warning lamp in the roll bar switch will blink for  approx  15 seconds  The blinking is reminding you to  raise the roll bar if the rear passenger seats are  occupied     Note     Have the roll bar system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     Warning     The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will  ONLY work with a special child seat designed to  operate with it  It will not work with child seats  which are not BabySmartTM compatible     Never place anything between seat cushion and  child seat  e g  pillow   since it reduces the  effectiveness of the deactivation system     Follow the manufacturer   s instructions for  installation of special child seats     The passenger side front airbag will not deploy  only if the 7 indicator lamp remains  illuminated     Please be sure to check the indicator every time  you use the special system child seat     Shoul
205. k regularly and before a long trip    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Check regularly and before a long trip  1 Engine oil level  See    Engine oil level  checking    on page 112 and  page 256     2 Coolant level  See    Coolant level    on page 257     3 Brake fluid  See    Brake fluid    on page 320     4 Windshield washer system  Headlamp cleaning system  For refilling reservoir see page 259     Opening hood  see page 254     Vehicle lighting  Check function and cleanliness  For  replacement of light bulbs  see    Exterior lamps    on  page 280     Exterior lamp switch  see page 114     J_A208 book Seite 226 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    227  Contents     Instrument cluster display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Instrument cluster display    Malfunction and  indicator lamps in the  instrument cluster                     228  On board diagnostic system  Check engine malfunction  indicator lamp                              228  Brake warning lamp                   229  Supplemental restraint  system  SRS  indicator lamp     230  Fuel reserve and fuel cap  placement warning                     230  Electronic stability program   ESP      warning lamp                231  BAS ESP malfunction  indicator lamp                              231  ABS malfunction  indicator lamp      
206. km h   The electronic key must be in steering lock  position 2     To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the  transmission  however  we recommend the drive shaft  be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any  towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage     Do not tow with sling type equipment  Towing with  sling type equipment over bumpy roads will damage  radiator and supports     Use wheel lift  dolly  or flat bed equipment  with  electronic key in steering lock turned to position 0     Note     To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning  flasher in use  turn electronic key in steering lock to  position 2 and activate combination switch for left or  right turn signal in usual manner     only the selected  turn signal will operate     Upon canceling the turn signal  the hazard warning  flasher will operate again     Caution     If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised  the  engine must be shut off  electronic key in steering lock  position 0 or 1   Otherwise  the ESP will immediately be  engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes  Switch off  the tow away alarm  see page 44  as well as the ESP  see  page 222      Warning     With the engine not running  there is no power  assistance for the braking and steering systems  In  this case  it is important to keep in mind that a  considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to  brake and steer the vehicle     J_A208 book Seite 278 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    279  Towing    
207. ks on the vehicle     The mechanical key  2  works only in the driver   s door   trunk  and glove box lock     When using the mechanical key  2  for lock operations   it can be removed by sliding it out of the remote control   To do so  move locking tab  3  to the right and slide the  mechanical key  2  in direction of arrow  4      The remote control transmitter is located in the  electronic key     The infrared receivers are located in the door handles     Notes     Remove the mechanical key from the electronic key  when using valet parking service  To prevent access to  trunk or storage compartments lock them separately  and retain the mechanical key     See page 37 for separate locking of trunk and page 151  for locking of glove box     Obtaining replacement keys    Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking  system requiring a special key manufacturing process   For security reasons  replacement keys can only be  obtained from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center     P80 35 2031 26    1    3    4    2    J_A208 book Seite 25 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    26  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Start lock out    Important     Removing the electronic key from the steering lock  activates the start lock out  The engine cannot be  started     Inserting the electronic key in the steering lock  deactivates the start lock out     Note     In 
208. leaving the vehicle always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  and lock the  vehicle  Do not leave children unattended in the  vehicle  or with access to an unlocked vehicle   Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause  serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 192 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    193  Steering lock    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Important     If the electronic key is left in the steering lock position 0  for an extended period of time  it can no longer be  turned in the lock  In this case  remove electronic key  from steering lock and reinsert     Caution     To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible  dead battery  always remove the electronic key from the  steering lock  Do not leave the electronic key in steering  lock position 0     Notes     A warning sounds when the driver   s door is opened  while the electronic key is in steering lock position 1  or 0     If the electronic key cannot be turned in the steering  lock  the vehicle battery may not be sufficiently charged   See battery on page 272 or jump starting on page 274     With the engine at idle speed  the charging rate of the  alternator  output  is limited     It is therefore recommended that you turn off  unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in stop   and go traffic  This precaution helps to avoid draining of  the battery     Unnecessary strain o
209. led  keep luggage cover in trunk in the open  position with the soft top raised     J_A208 book Seite 162 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    163  Soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Important     Do not manually move corner flaps  1  of soft top  compartment cover  Doing so will result in damage to  the soft top folding mechanism that is not covered by  the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     With the soft top lowered do not place anything on the  soft top compartment cover  2      The soft top compartment cover must never be used by  any persons as a seat bench  Raising of the roll bar  could result in personal injury     Warning     Never lock or unlock the soft top while driving   Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of  the vehicle     Driving with an unlocked soft top may cause  personal injury to you or your passenger  or  personal injury or property damage to others     Before operating the soft top switch make sure that  no persons due to inattention are injured by the  moving parts  roll bar  soft top frame and soft top  compartment cover      Hands must never be placed near the roll bar  soft  top frame  upper windshield area or soft top storage  compartment while the soft top is being raised or  lowered  Serious personal injury may occur     In case of danger release the switch to immediately  interrupt the operating procedure     P65 10 2081 26    2 
210. lfunction  has been detected in either system  As a result  it is  possible that now only partial engine output will be  available  If the BAS malfunctions  the brake system  functions in the usual manner  but without BAS     If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts  the  malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the BAS is  switched off  When the voltage is above this value again   the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  BAS is operational     With the ABS malfunctioning  the BAS is also switched  off  Both malfunction indicator lamps come on with the  engine running     If the BAS warning message is displayed  have the BAS  or ESP checked at your authorized Mercedes Benz  Center as soon as possible     J_A208 book Seite 217 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    218  Driving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Antilock brake system  ABS     Important     The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during  hard braking maneuvers     The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a  vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph  8 km h   independent of road surface conditions     At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up  a  slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal   indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode  Keep  firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while  experiencing the pulsation     Continuous steady brake pedal pressure re
211. lity  consult your authorized Mercedes Benz Center     Anticorrosion antifreeze    Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts  The  use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines  necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used  in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the  aluminum parts   Failure to use such anticorrosion   antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly  shortened service life      Therefore the following product is strongly  recommended for use in your vehicle  Mercedes Benz  Anticorrosion antifreeze agent     Before the start of the winter season  or once a year in  the hot southern regions   you should have the  anticorrosion antifreeze concentration checked  The  coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring  your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes Benz Center  for service     Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity    Model  Approx  freeze protection     35  F    37  C    49  F     45  C     CLK 320  4 8 US qt   4 5 l   5 3 US qt   5 0 l     CLK 430   CLK 55 AMG  5 9 US qt   5 6 l   6 5 US qt   6 1 l     J_A208 book Seite 323 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    324  Consumer information    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Consumer information    This has been prepared as required of all manufactures  of passenger cars under Title 49  Code of U S  Federal  Regulations  Part 575 pursuant to the    National Traffic  and M
212. ll not be activated   The driver and passenger will then be protected by  the fastened seat belts     We caution you not to rely on the presence of the  airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt     J_A208 book Seite 70 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    71  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags  which are designed to activate in certain impacts  exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential  and severity of injury  It is important to your safety  and that of your passengers that you replace  deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning  airbags to ensure the vehicle will continue to  provide crash protection for occupants     Warning     Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of  injury in certain frontal  front airbags  impacts   and side  side impact airbags  impacts which may  cause significant injuries  however  no system  available today can totally eliminate injuries and  fatalities     The activation of the    SRS    temporarily releases a  small amount of dust from the airbags  This dust   however  is neither injurious to your health  nor  does it indicate a fire in the vehicle  The dust might  cause some temporary breathing difficulty for  people with asthma or other breathing trouble  To  avoid this  you may wish to get out of the vehicle as  soon as it is safe to do so  If you have 
213. lose trunk lid     Important     Do not place mechanical key inside trunk  since trunk is  locked again when closing the lid     18  Press lock button  9  and fold down locking  handle  10      P65 10 2009 26    9    10    J_A208 book Seite 296 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    297  Emergency operation of soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    19  Turn locking handle 90   clockwise and pull soft top  frame carefully down until it meets the windshield  header attachment points     Turn locking handle counterclockwise to the stop to  lock the soft top     Fold locking handle up until lock button engages     Note     Have the soft top operation checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     J_A208 book Seite 297 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    298  Emergency operation of soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Antenna    The non retractable antenna should be removed before  entering an automatic car wash  to avoid damage to the  antenna mast or vehicle paint finish     Do not use tools  e g  pliers  for the antenna mast  removal     To remove   Unscrew antenna counterclockwise  1      To install   Carefully position antenna mast on threaded socket and  turn clockwise  2  until hand tight     J_A208 book Seite 298 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09   
214. ls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Checking engine oil level  CLK 320 shown     1 Oil dipstick    2 Oil filler cap    To check the engine oil level  park vehicle on level  ground  with engine at normal operational temperature     Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after  stopping the engine  allowing for the oil to return to the  oil pan     Wipe oil dipstick clean prior to checking the engine oil  level  Fully insert dipstick in tube  and remove after  three seconds to obtain accurate reading     Oil level must be between the  lower  min  and upper  max  mark of  the dipstick     Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking  level is approximately 2 0 US qt  2 0 l      Do not overfill the engine  Excessive oil must be drained  or siphoned  It could cause damage to engine and  catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz  Limited Warranty     See malfunction and warning messages on page 234 if  an engine oil level display appears on the multifunction  display when the engine is running     Note     See page 112 for engine oil level indicator     Mercedes Benz    Mercedes Benz    2    1    J_A208 book Seite 256 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    257  Engine compartment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Automatic transmission fluid level    The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic  transm
215. lt must be replaced  before continuing to operate the vehicle  Otherwise  the  engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump  which may result in damage to the engine     Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message  displayed     Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is  not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty   Line 1  Line 2    BATTERY ALTERNATOR  VISIT WORKSHOP     OVERVOLTAGE  VISIT WORKSHOP     UNDERVOLTAGE  CONSUMER DEFECTIVE     J_A208 book Seite 236 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    237  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    ABS SYSTEM    A malfunction has been detected in the system  The  brake system functions in the usual manner  but  without antilock assistance     With the ABS malfunctioning  the BAS and ESP are also  switched off     Have the system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     BRAKE ASSIST    A malfunction has been detected in the system  The  brake system functions in the usual manner  but  without BAS     Line 1  Line 2    ABS SYSTEM  VISIT WORKSHOP     P54 30 2938 21    Line 1  Line 2    BRAKE ASSIST  VISIT WORKSHOP     DISPLAY DEFECTIVE  VISIT WORKSHOP     J_A208 book Seite 237 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    238  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  
216. m  ESP     The ESP enhances directional control and reduces  driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving  conditions     Over understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by  applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a  countervailing vehicle movement  Engine torque is also  limited  The ESP warning lamp  located in the  speedometer dial  starts to flash when ESP is in  operation     Important     If the ESP warning lamp v flashes         During take off apply as little throttle as possible         While driving ease up on the accelerator         Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  conditions         Do not switch off the ESP     Caution     If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised  see  towing the vehicle on page 276   the engine must be  shut off  electronic key in steering lock position 0 or 1    Otherwise  the ESP will immediately be engaged and  will apply the rear wheel brakes     Warning     ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  from acting on the vehicle  nor can it increase the  traction afforded  The ESP cannot prevent  accidents  including those resulting from excessive  speed in turns  or aquaplaning  Only a safe   attentive  and skillful driver can prevent accidents   The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must  never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  manner which could jeopardize the user   s safety or  the safety of others     J_A208 book Seite 220 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    221  Dri
217. martTM airbag deactivation system                      64  Self test                                                                          65  Backrest  front seat                                                           54  BAS  Brake assist system                                               216  Malfunction indicator lamp                                      231  Battery                                                                              272  Battery recycling                                                        273    BATTERY ALTERNATOR    malfunction and warning messages                       236  Block heater                                                                     213  BRAKE ASSIST   malfunction  and warning messages                                              237  Brake assist system  BAS                                              216  Malfunction indicator lamp                                      231  Brake fluid                                                      229  318  320  Capacity                                                                       318  BRAKE FLUID   malfunction  and warning messages                                              238  BRAKE LINING WEAR   malfunction  and warning messages                                              238  Brake pad wear                                                                238  Brake warning lamp                                                       229  Brake fluid low   
218. may cause serious damage to the  drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz  Limited Warranty     Warning     If other than recommended brake pads are  installed  or other than recommended brake fluid  is used  the braking properties of the vehicle can be  degraded to an extent that safe braking is  substantially impaired  This could result in an  accident     J_A208 book Seite 207 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    208  Driving instructions    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Parking    Important     It is advisable to set the parking brake whenever  parking or leaving the vehicle  In addition  move  selector lever to position    P        When parking on hills  always set the parking brake     Tires    Tread wear indicators  TWI  are required by law  These  indicators are located in six places on the tread  circumference and become visible at a tread depth of  approximately 1 16 in  1 5 mm   at which point the tire is  considered worn and should be replaced     The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across  the tread     Warning     To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of  vehicle movement  before turning off the engine  and leaving the vehicle  always     1  Keep right foot on the service brake pedal     2  Firmly depress parking brake pedal     3  Move the selector lever to position    P        4  Slowly release the service brake pedal     5  T
219. mbination switch pushed forward        Standing lamps  right  turn left one stop         Standing lamps  left  turn left two stops         Front fog lamps  pull out one stop  with parking  lamps and or low beam headlamps on  Green  indicator lamp in lamp switch comes on         Rear fog lamp  pull out to 2nd detent  in addition  to fog lamps  Yellow indicator lamp in lamp switch  comes on     Standing lamps    When the vehicle is parked on the street the standing  lamps  right or left side parking lamps  can be turned  on  making the vehicle more visible to passing vehicles     The standing lamps cannot be operated with the  electronic key in steering lock position 2     J_A208 book Seite 114 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    115  Exterior lamp switch    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Notes     With the electronic key removed and the driver   s door  open  a warning sounds and the message    SWITCH OFF  LIGHTS    in the multifunction indicator appears if the  vehicle   s exterior lamps  except standing lamps  are not  switched off     Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and or  the low beam headlamps on  Fog lamps should only be  used in conjunction with low beam headlamps  Consult  your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations  regarding allowable lamp operation     Fog lamps are automatically switched off when the  exterior lamp switch is turned to position D    
220. mendments is  reserved     Operating safety    1  Optional equipment    Dolby and the double D symbol    are trademarks of Dolby  Laboratories Licensing Corporation  The Dolby noise reduction  system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories  Licensing Corporation     Warning     In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an  accident  system settings should be entered with  the vehicle at standstill and systems should be  operated by the driver only when traffic conditions  permit  Always pay full attention to traffic  conditions first before operating system controls  while driving     Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph   approximately 50 km h   your vehicle is covering  a distance of approximately 50 feet  approximately  14 m  every second     Warning     Any alternations made to electronic components  can cause malfunctions     The radio  cassette deck  CD changer1 and  telephone1 are interconnected  Therefore  when  one of the components is defective or has not been  removed replaced properly this may impair the  function of other components     These malfunctions might seriously impair the  operating safety of your vehicle     We recommend that you have any service work or  alternations on electronic components done in an  authorized Mercedes Benz Center     J_A208 book Seite 127 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    128  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints
221. mp can be switched off by pulling out the  plunger in the switch  arrow   This prevents the vehicle  battery from being discharged     When the trunk lid is closed  the switch will reset and  turn on the lamp next time the lid is opened     P82 20 2029 26    J_A208 book Seite 39 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    40  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Trunk lid release switch    The switch is located on the center console     A minimum height clearance of 5 9 ft   1 8 m  is  required to open the trunk lid     To open the trunk  the vehicle must be at standstill  Pull  up on switch until trunk lid is open     The indicator lamp in the switch remains on with trunk  lid open     Notes     The trunk can also be opened by using the electronic  key  Press    button     The trunk lid cannot be opened by the switch or the  remote control when previously locked separately with  the mechanical key  To open  see page 37     The trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid  release switch when the vehicle was previously locked  with the central locking switch  To unlock vehicle with  the central locking switch  see page 35     J_A208 book Seite 40 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    41  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Trunk lid emergency release  
222. n  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    The radio will switch to  cassette mode  Track 1 will be  played and    SIDE 1     displayed  Track 1 is the side  of the cassette which is facing  upwards  The cassette deck will automatically detect the  type of tape and switch the equalization automatically   A cassette symbol in the display indicates that a tape is  in the mechanism  This symbol appears in all modes but  not in cassette mode     The cassette will not be ejected when the radio is  switched off or another mode is selected     If a cassette is in the  mechanism  cassette mode  can be selected by using the     TAPE    button  If no cassette  has been inserted  the display  will show    NO TAPE        Cassette eject    Press the eject  EJ  key  The display will fold down and  the cassette will be ejected  Remove the cassette  then  fold the display back up manually  The radio will switch  back to radio mode automatically     Note     The cassette will not be ejected when the radio is  switched off     Important     If the display is in the down position for more than  20 seconds  2 successive beeps will be heard  This will  continue at 5 second intervals until the display is  returned to its normal position     Track selection    Press the track selection   TRK  key  The current track  will be displayed as    SIDE 1     or    SIDE 2     The track will be  changed automatically at the  end of the tape     J_A208 book Seite 136 Donnerst
223. n be very hot  Allow the  lamp to cool down before changing a bulb     Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas  A bulb can  explode if you         touch or move it when hot         drop the bulb         scratch the bulb     Wear eye and hand protection     Warning     Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps  it is  dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp  and its components  We recommend that you have  such work done by a qualified technician     J_A208 book Seite 280 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    281  Exterior lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Headlamp assembly  Halogen     1 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw    2 Cover for low beam headlamp    3 Cover for high beam headlamp  parking and  standing lamp    Headlamp assembly  Xenon    optional  standard on model CLK 55 AMG     4 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp    5 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb    6 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb    7 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp    P82 10 2394 26    4    1    5  6    7    2    3    4    6    7    2    3    P82 10 2395 26    5    1    J_A208 book Seite 281 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    282  Exterior lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Bulbs for low or high beam  H7  55 W     Open hood     Rotate cover  2 or 3  counterclockw
224. n incorrectly  mounted child seat could cause injuries to the  child in case of an accident instead of protecting  the child     Follow the manufacturer   s instructions for  installation of special child seats     The passenger side front airbag will not deploy  only if the 7 indicator lamp remains  illuminated     Please be sure to check the indicator every time  you use the special system child seat     Should the light go out while the restraint is  installed  please check installation  If the light  remains out  do not use the BabySmartTM restraint  to transport children on the front passenger seat  until the system has been repaired     J_A208 book Seite 64 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    65  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Self test BabySmartTM  without special child seat installed    After turning electronic key in steering lock to  position 1 or 2  the 7 indicator lamp located on the  center console comes on for approx  6 seconds and then  extinguishes     If the indicator lamp should not come on or is  continuously lit  the system is not functioning  You must  see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center before seating  any child on the front passenger seat     BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp     Supplemental restraint system  SRS     Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts   Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airb
225. n of the arrow until  your arms are slightly angled when holding the  steering wheel     5 Head restraint  During seat adjustment  the head restraint is  automatically adjusted based on seat  fore aft   position to support the back of the head  approximately at ear level  Please check the position  of the head restraint to assure that it supports the  back of the head approximately at ear level  The  head restraint angle can also be adjusted manually     8    7    4    5    2  2    1  3    J_A208 book Seite 46 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    47  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Notes     Your vehicle is equipped with power head restraints  do  not try to raise or lower them manually     Only minor personal adjustments  as described below   should then be required   For steering wheel adjustment  see page 77   inside rear view mirror  see page 78   exterior rear view mirrors  see page 79     Caution     Do not remove head restraints except when mounting  seat covers  For removal see page 51  Whenever  restraints have been removed be sure to reinstall them  before driving     J_A208 book Seite 47 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    48  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Memory storing and recalling    6 Memory button    7 Position buttons    Storing    Three sets of sea
226. n permissible  limits required by law     These systems  of course  will function properly only  when maintained strictly according to factory  specifications  Any adjustments on the engine should   therefore  be carried out only by qualified Mercedes   Benz authorized center technicians  Engine adjustments  should not be altered in any way  Moreover  the  specified service jobs must be carried out regularly  according to Mercedes Benz servicing requirements   For details refer to the Service Booklet     Warning     Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your  health  All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide   and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and  lead to death     Do not run the engine in confined areas  such as a  garage  which are not properly ventilated  If you  think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the  vehicle while driving  have the cause determined  and corrected immediately  If you must drive under  these conditions  drive only with at least one  window fully open     J_A208 book Seite 181 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    182  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Tele Aid  optional for Canada     Important     The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be  performed by completing the subscriber agreement and  placing an acquaintance call using the    SOS    button   Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a  system th
227. n signal lamp  21 W 24 cp bulb     2 Stop  tail  parking  and side marker lamp   21 4 W bulb     3 Tail and parking lamp  5 W 4 cp bulb     4 Driver   s side   Rear fog lamp  21 W 32 cp bulb     5 Backup lamp  21 W 32 cp bulb     Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out  Push  bulb into socket  turn counterclockwise and remove     Insert new bulb in socket  push in and twist clockwise   Reinstall bulb socket  Close cover  bulbs 1  2 and 3      1    2    3    P82 10 2080 26  P82 10 2083 26    4    5    J_A208 book Seite 283 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    284  Exterior lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Side marker lamp  front  5 W 4 cp bulb   Carefully slide lamp towards front  arrow   and remove  back and first     Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out  Push  bulb socket  turn counterclockwise and remove     Insert new bulb in socket  push in and twist clockwise   Reinstall bulb socket  push in and twist clockwise     To reinstall lamp  set front end of lamp in bumper and  let back end snap into place     J_A208 book Seite 284 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    285  Exterior lamps    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    High mounted stop lamp   Additional turn signals on the exterior mirror    The high mounted stop lamp  3rd brake lamp   and the  additional turn
228. n the  multifunction display  The nature of the need for  assistance can then be described  The Mercedes Benz  Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a  qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow  your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center  For    services such as labor and or towing charges may apply   Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more  information     These programs are only available in the USA         Sign and Drive services  Services such as jump start   a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire  with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable         Remote Vehicle Diagnostics  This function permits  the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher  to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle  data     Notes     The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance  button     remains illuminated in red for approx   10 seconds during the system self check after turning  electronic key in starter switch to position 2  together  with the    SOS    button and the Information  button         See system self check on page 182 when the indicator  lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than  approximately 10 seconds     J_A208 book Seite 186 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    187  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance  button     is illuminated continuously and there 
229. n the battery and charging system  may be minimized by turning off the following power  consumers  for example  Heated seats  rear window  defroster  In addition  the automatic climate air volume  control should be set to the lowest position     The steering lock can only be unlocked with the vehicle  battery properly charged and connected     J_A208 book Seite 193 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    194  Starting and turning off the engine    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Starting and turning off the engine    Before starting    Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector  lever is in position    P    or    N     Turn electronic key in  steering lock to position 2     Starting    Do not depress accelerator     Briefly turn electronic key in steering lock clockwise to  the stop and release  The starter will engage until the  engine is running     If engine will not run  and the starting procedure stops   turn electronic key completely to the left and repeat  starting the engine     After several unsuccessful attempts  have the system  checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz  Center     Important     Due to the installed starter non repeat feature  the  electronic key must be turned completely to the left  before attempting to start the engine again     In areas where temperatures frequently drop below  4  F    20  C  we recommend that an engine block heater be
230. n up     The shoulder portion of the seat belt must be pulled  snug and checked for snugness immediately after  engaging it     Adjust seat belt so that shoulder portion is located as  close as possible to the middle of your shoulder  it  should not touch the neck      Unfastening of seat belts    Push the release button  3  in the belt buckle  2   Allow  the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by  guiding the latch plate  1      Operation    The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during  sudden vehicle stops or when quickly pulling on the  belt  The locking function of the reel may be checked by  quickly pulling out the belt     P91 40 2102 26    1    2  3    J_A208 book Seite 61 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    62  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Caution     For safety reasons  avoid adjusting the seat or backrest  into positions which could affect the correct seat belt  position     Warning     USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY         Seat belts can only work when used properly   Never wear seat belts in any other way than as  described in this section  as that could result  in serious injuries in case of an accident         Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all  times  because seat belts help reduce the  likelihood of and potential severity of injuries  in accidents  including rollovers  The  integrated restraint system includes    SR
231. nal range of the remote  control  it could be possible to unintentionally lock or  unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button  If  one of the transmit buttons is pressed  the battery check  lamp lights up briefly     indicating that the batteries are  in order  See page 288 for checking batteries     The vehicle doors  trunk and fuel filler flap can be  centrally locked and unlocked via remote control     Opening and closing the windows remotely can only be  done with the infrared portion of the remote control   Aim transmitter eye at a receiver  6 or 7   press and  hold transmit button    or         If the electronic key is inserted in steering lock  the  vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote  control     1 Transmit button        Locking       Unlocking       Opening trunk  if not separately locked     2 Lamp for battery check  see page 288 for changing  batteries if it does not light up briefly     3 PANIC button    4 Transmitter eye    5 Locking tab for mechanical key    P80 35 2032 26    2    4    3    5    1    J_A208 book Seite 27 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    28  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    6 Infrared receiver in driver   s door handle  7 Infrared receiver in passenger door handle    P80 30 2081 26    6    P80 30 2082 20    7    J_A208 book Seite 28 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    29  Central locking system    T
232. nd  have the system checked or contact the Response Center  at 1 800 756 9018  in the USA  or 1 888 923 8367  in  Canada  as soon as possible     Upgrade Signals    Tele Aid system processes calls using the following  priority         Automatic emergency     First priority        Manual emergency     Second priority        Roadside assistance     Third priority        Information     Fourth priority    Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are  connected  an upgrade  alternating  tone will be heard   and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash  If certain  information such as vehicle identification number or  customer information is not available  the operator may  need to retransmit  During this time you will hear a  chirp and voice contact will be interrupted  Voice  contact will resume once the retransmission is  completed  Once a call is concluded  a chirp will be  heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will stop  flashing  The COMAND system operation will resume   only vehicles with COMAND      J_A208 book Seite 188 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    189  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Important     If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system  does not reset  contact the Response Center at  1 800 756 9018  in the USA  or 1 888 923 8367  in  Canada   or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at  1 800 FOR MERCedes  1 800 367 6372  in the 
233. nd screen    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Roller Blind  horizontal   To open blind     1  Pull out blind on tab  arrow 1  towards vehicles rear   Insert guide rod of blind in right rear seat belt outlet   arrow 2      2  Insert other end of rod in left rear seat belt outlet as  shown with arrow  3      Important     Do not place anything on the roller blind     To retract blind         Hold blind at tab  disengage and guide retraction     3    1    2    P65 00 2049 26    J_A208 book Seite 174 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    175  Wind screen    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Roller Blind  vertical   To open blind     1  Fold driver and front passenger seat backrests  forward     2  Pull out on tab  located below rear bench  towards  vehicle   s front  then pull up and engage blind at  wind screen     To retract blind     1  Fold driver and front passenger seat backrests  forward     2  Hold blind at tab  disengage and guide its retraction     P65 00 2018 26    J_A208 book Seite 175 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    J_A208 book Seite 176 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    177  Contents     Driving    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Driving    Control and operation of  radio transmi
234. ndling characteristics  and safety of the vehicle     Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and  damage to the tire beads  For this reason  check rims for  damage at regular intervals  The rim flanges must be  checked for wear before a tire is mounted  Remove  burrs  if any     Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure after  rotating the wheels  For tire inflation pressure see  inside of fuel filler flap and also page 271     J_A208 book Seite 263 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    264  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Spare wheel    Spare wheel CLK 320  except Sport Package     Important     The spare wheel rim is mounted with a full size tire of  the same type as on the vehicle  and is fully functional   However  that spare wheel rim is weight optimized and  has a limited service life of 12 000 miles  20 000 km   use before a standard wheel rim must replace it     In the case of a flat tire  you may temporarily use the  spare wheel     Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel  mounted     Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow  on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward  movement     If the arrow on tire side wall does not point in direction  of vehicle forward movement when using the spare  wheel  observe the following restriction         Drive to the nearest tire repair facility as soon as  possible
235. necessary to change  the batteries in the electronic key  if ok  battery check  lamp in electronic key will light briefly when pressing  transmit button  or to synchronize the remote control   see pages 288 and 290     J_A208 book Seite 29 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    30  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Choosing global or selective mode on remote control    Press and hold transmit buttons     and     simultaneously for approx  6 seconds to reprogram the  remote control  Battery check lamp will blink two times  indicating the completed mode change     Opening the trunk    Press transmit button    until trunk lid is released     A minimum height clearance of 5 9 ft   1 8 m  is  required to open the trunk lid     Important     Do not place remote control in trunk since trunk is  locked when the lid is closed if the vehicle is centrally  locked     Note     If the trunk was previously locked separately  it will  remain locked  see page 37     J_A208 book Seite 30 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    31  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Opening and closing windows from outside    Aim transmitter eye of remote control at a door receiver     To open     Continue to press transmit button    after unlocking  the vehicle     The windows be
236. ned in  the vehicle     The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects     J_A208 book Seite 213 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    214  Driving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Cruise control    The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed  manner  for example over long distances  as it  automatically maintains the set speed by actively  regulating the throttle setting     Any given speed above approximately 25 mph   40 km h  can be maintained with the cruise control by  operating the lever     1 Accelerate and set   Lift lever briefly to set speed   Hold lever up to accelerate     2 Decelerate and set   Depress lever briefly to set speed   Hold lever down to decelerate     Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired  speed with the accelerator     Speed is set by briefly pushing the lever to  position 1 or 2  The accelerator can then be  released     The speed can be increased  e g  for passing  by  using the accelerator  After the accelerator is  released  the previously set speed will be resumed  automatically     If a set speed is to be increased or decreased  slightly  e  g  to adapt to the traffic flow  hold lever in  position 1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached  or  briefly tip the lever in the appropriate direction for  increases or decreases in 0 6 mph  1 km h   increments  When the lever is released  the newly  set speed remains   
237. ngine   gasoline injection  4 stroke engine   gasoline injection  4 stroke engine   gasoline injection    No  of cylinders  6  8  8    Bore  3 54 in  89 90 mm   3 54 in  89 90 mm   3 82 in  97 00 mm     Stroke  3 31 in  84 00 mm   3 31 in  84 00 mm   3 60 in  92 00 mm     Total piston displacement  195 2 cu in   3199 cm3   260 3 cu in   4265 cm3   322 0 cu in   5439 cm3     Compression ratio  10 1  10 1  10 5 1    Output acc  to SAE J 1349  215 hp 5700 rpm   160 kW 5700 rpm   275 hp 5750 rpm   205 kW 5750 rpm   342 hp 5500 rpm   255 kW 5500 rpm     Maximum torque acc  to SAE J 1349  232 ft lb 3000 rpm   315 Nm 3000 rpm   295 ft lb 3200 rpm   400 Nm 3200 rpm   376 ft lb 3000 rpm   510 Nm 3000 rpm     Maximum engine speed  6000 rpm  6000 rpm  6000 rpm    Firing order  1 4 3 6 2 5  1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8  1 5 4 2 6 3 7 8    Poly V belt  2390 mm  2390 mm  2390 mm    1  The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle  See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the  corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment     J_A208 book Seite 313 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    314  Technical data    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Rims     Tires  except Sport Package   Rims     Tires  Sport Package     1  Also permissible 225 45 ZR 17     2  Also permissible 245 40 ZR 17 3    3  Must not be used with snow chains     4  Also permissible 225 45 ZR 17 91 Y     5  Also permissible
238. ning the electronic key in starter  switch to position 2  malfunctions are detected and  indicated  the indicator lamps in the    SOS    button  the  Roadside Assistance button     and the Information  button    stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not  come on   The message    TELE AID     VISIT  WORKSHOP    appears for approx  10 seconds in the  multifunction display     J_A208 book Seite 182 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    183  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Important     Always make sure that the indicator lamps in the     SOS    button  in the    Roadside Assistance    button and  in the    Information    button do not remain illuminated  constantly in red and the message    TELE AID   VISIT  WORKSHOP    is not displayed in the multifunction  display after the system self check     If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above  have the  system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as  soon as possible     Emergency calls    An emergency call is initiated automatically         following an accident in which the Emergency  Tensioning Retractors  ETR   s  or airbags deploy         if the antitheft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on  for more than 20 seconds  see pages 43 and 44     An emergency call can also be initiated manually by  opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror  labeled    SOS     then briefly pressing the button located  und
239. not supplied with  vehicle  or sizable wood block or stone  When  changing a wheel on a hill  place chocks on the  downhill side blocking both wheels of the other  axle  On a level road  place one chock in front of and  one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to  the wheel being changed     Warning     The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the  vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the  vehicle  To help avoid personal injury  use the jack  only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change   Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported  by the jack  Keep hands and feet away from the area  under the lifted vehicle  Always firmly set parking  brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with  jack     Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is  raised  Be certain that the jack is always vertical  when in use  especially on hills  Always try to use  the jack on level surface  Be sure that the jack arm  is fully inserted in the jack tube  Always lower the  vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before  working under the vehicle     Warning     Before working on the vehicle  e g  when changing  wheels  the roll bar should be raised with the  switch  and the electronic key be removed from the  steering lock  to prevent possible injury     J_A208 book Seite 266 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    267  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car ca
240. now locked     To deactivate  release seat belt buckle and let seat belt  retract completely  The seat belt can again be used in  the usual manner     Important     The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in  all 50 states and all Canadian provinces     Infants and small children should be seated in an  appropriate infant or child restraint system properly  secured by a lap shoulder belt  and that complies with  U S  Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and  Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213   A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of  compliance with this standard can be found on the  instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction  manual provided with the restraint     When using any infant or child restraint system  be sure  to carefully read and follow all manufacturer   s  instructions for installation and use     Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside  of vehicle and to infant or child restraints     Warning     Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is  in motion  since the special seat belt retractor will  be deactivated     J_A208 book Seite 75 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    76  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Warning     Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  the front seat  except in a Mercedes Benz  authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat   which o
241. ns or under extreme operating  conditions  This gear selection will allow use of  the engine   s braking power when descending  steep grades     Use this position  which makes maximum use of  the engine   s braking effect  while descending  very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at  speeds below 40 mph  60 km h      J_A208 book Seite 201 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    202  Automatic transmission    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Program mode selector switch    The transmission is provided with a selector switch  1   for Standard    S    and Winter Wet  snow and ice     W     program modes     S  Standard mode    Press switch on symbol    S     Use this mode for all  regular driving     The vehicle starts out in 1st gear     Accelerator Operation   Fast on   depressing the accelerator pedal quickly   not into kickdown position  while driving  continuously  rather than depressing the  accelerator pedal in the usual manner  will cause  the automatic transmission to shift down into a  lower gear  This gear shifting process is  dependent on the current vehicle speed     Fast off   there will be no upshift when releasing  the accelerator pedal quickly  e g  using the  engine   s braking power during performance  driving     W  Winter Wet  snow and ice  mode    Press switch on symbol    W     The vehicle starts  out in 2nd gear  except with selector lever in 1st  gear  or with a
242. nts etc     Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Premium unleaded gasoline    Caution     To maintain the engine   s durability and performance   premium unleaded gasoline must be used  If premium  unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used   follow these precautions         have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded  regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon  as possible         avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration         do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm  if the  vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two  persons and no luggage         do not exceed 2 3 of maximum accelerator pedal  position  if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in  mountainous terrain     Fuel requirements    Use only Premium unleaded meeting ASTM  standard D 439     The octane number  posted at the pump  must be  91 min  It is an average of both the Research  R  octane  number and the Motor  M  octane number    R M  2    This is also known as ANTI KNOCK INDEX     Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as  Ethanol  IPA  IBA and TBA can be used provided the  ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not  exceed 10   MTBE not to exceed 15      The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3   plus additional cosolvents     Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed   Gasohol  which contains 10  Ethanol and 90  unlead
243. o adjustment       FREQUENCY        use the j or k button to  select a frequency       MEMORY        use the j or k button to select  a stored station  preset memory     9 See page 108 for instructions on returning the  setting menus to the factory settings    10 Selection marker     indicates the setting selected    Notes     These settings may only be performed with the vehicle  at standstill and with the key in steering lock position 1  or 2     J_A208 book Seite 107 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    108  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Press the    or    button repeatedly until the  individual setting preliminary display  1  appear     Press the j or k button until the required setting  menu  2 to 8  is displayed     Pressing the    or    button sets the time in  setting menus  2  3  and controls the selection marker  in setting menus  4 to 8    The settings made are stored and applied immediately     The individual setting preliminary display  1  will  appear again after you have run through all the setting  menus     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     Notes     Settings can only be selected with the vehicle stationary  or moving slowly     The individual setting preliminary display  1  will  appear if you speed up     The setting menu previously called up will reappear  when the vehi
244. o not place soft top frame  5  onto windshield  header     10  Place rear window section of soft top  6  in its  vertical position     11  Close soft top compartment cover  2  by placing  hands near edges  arrows   The soft top  compartment cover must lock in the first notch of  compartment cover catch     12  Lock soft top storage compartment     Place open end wrench  1  on bolt between backrest  and soft top compartment cover  Turn wrench  1  in  direction of arrow to its stop and remove     6    P77 30 2033 26    5  4    2    1    P77 30 2030 26    J_A208 book Seite 294 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    295  Emergency operation of soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    13  Lower rear window section of soft top  6      14  Open trunk lid with mechanical key and carefully  guide luggage cover  page 250  into its storage  compartment     15  Insert hex socket wrench  7  to lock the soft top bow     Press soft top bow down onto soft top compartment  cover     Insert and turn wrench in direction of arrow  8  to  lock soft top bow     6    P77 30 2032 26    J_A208 book Seite 295 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    296  Emergency operation of soft top    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    16  Using screwdriver  supplied in vehicle tool kit   turn  screw clockwise to the stop     17  C
245. on  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Express opening and closing of door windows    Press switch k or j past resistance point and  release     window opens or closes completely     To interrupt procedure  briefly press k or j     If the upward movement of the window is blocked  during the closing procedure  the window will stop  during the last few inches before closure and open  slightly     When pressing and holding the switch j to close the  window  and upward movement of the window is  blocked during the last few inches before closure  it will  stop but not open slightly     Notes     The power windows can also be opened and closed with  the infrared remote control while locking the vehicle  doors or trunk  see page 31     If the express closing function of the door windows is  interrupted  press and hold the switch j to close the  window completely     The automatic full closing procedure of the window  should now be reactivated     The rear windows can only be opened using the express  feature     Synchronizing power windows    If the power supply was interrupted  battery  disconnected or low   the windows cannot be opened or  closed  only door windows  by the Express feature     To resynchronize the express feature  press j side of  power window switch until the window is completely  closed and hold for additional 2 seconds  Repeat  procedure for each window     The automatic full opening and closing  only door  windows  procedu
246. on system is switched on and  destination guidance is active     Press the    or    button repeatedly until the  required system is displayed     See the separate COMAND  Cockpit Management and  Data System  operator   s manual for notes on the  navigation system     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     P54 30 2985 27    J_A208 book Seite 101 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    102  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Trip computer  1    AFTER START        trip odometer records distance  from first engine start after more than five hours of  electronic key not being in steering lock position 2    2    AFTER RESET        trip odometer records distance  from first engine start until reset    3 Estimated driving range remaining and fuel tank  contents    4 Distance covered    AFTER START    respectively     AFTER RESET       5 Elapsed time    AFTER START    respectively     AFTER RESET       6 Average speed    AFTER START    respectively     AFTER RESET       7 Average fuel consumption    AFTER START     respectively    AFTER RESET       J_A208 book Seite 102 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    103  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Press the button    
247. onditions   the tire traction varies widely     Warning     Do not drive with a flat tire  A flat tire affects the  ability to steer or brake the vehicle  You may lose  control of the vehicle  Continued driving with a flat  tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will  cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire     J_A208 book Seite 209 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    210  Driving instructions    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Tire traction    The safe speed on a wet  snow covered or icy road is  always lower than on a dry road     You should pay particular attention to the condition of  the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to  the freezing point     We recommend M S rated radial ply tires for the winter  season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced  handling characteristics  On packed snow  they can  reduce your stopping distance as compared with  summer tires  Stopping distance  however  is still  considerably greater than when the road is not snow or  ice covered     Tire speed rating    CLK 320   Your vehicle is factory equipped with    H    rated tires   which have a speed rating of 130 mph  210 km h      CLK 430   Your vehicle is factory equipped with    W    rated tires   which are permissible for speeds up to 168 mph   270 km h      An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from  exceeding a speed of 130 mph  210 km h     
248. or    repeatedly until the  display  1  appears     Press the j or k button until the display for trip  odometer memory    AFTER START     1  and     AFTER RESET     2   or the display  3  for estimated  driving range remaining and fuel tank contents  appears     Important     The reading in the display    TANK CONTENT    might be  off by approximately       2 2 US qt  2 l   Please refuel in  time     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     Note     The    AFTER START    display  1  always appears when  the trip computer is called up     To reset the    AFTER START     1  or    AFTER RESET     2   odometer memory at any time     Call up the relevant display  1 or 2  using the j or  k button and press the J button in the instrument  cluster until the values are reset to    0        The    AFTER START    trip odometer reading is  automatically reset after four hours of electronic key not  being in steering lock position 2     J_A208 book Seite 103 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    104  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Malfunction warning message memory  1 There are no messages stored in the system    2 Number of messages stored in the system    Press the    or    button repeatedly until the  malfunction message memory  1 or 2  is displayed     Press the j or k button if display  2  appears   The s
249. ore severe without your seat belt  properly buckled  Without your seat belt buckled   you are much more likely to hit the interior of the  vehicle or be ejected from it  You can be seriously  injured or killed     In the same crash  the possibility for injury or  death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt     Warning     Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there  are seat belts available  Be sure everyone riding in  the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate  seat belt     J_A208 book Seite 59 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    60  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Fastening of seat belts    1 Latch plate    2 Buckle    3 Release button    Push latch plate  1  into buckle  2  until it clicks  Do not  twist the belt  A twisted seat belt may cause injury     To help avoid severe or fatal injuries  the lap belt must  be positioned as low as possible on your hips and not  across the abdomen     1    2    3    Warning     Always fasten your seat belt before driving off   Always make sure your passengers are properly  restrained     even those sitting in the rear     J_A208 book Seite 60 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    61  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder  portio
250. ot prevent the natural laws of physics  from acting on the vehicle  nor can it increase  braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the  condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the  traction afforded  The BAS cannot prevent  accidents  including those resulting from excessive  speed in turns  following another vehicle too  closely  or aquaplaning  Only a safe  attentive  and  skillful driver can prevent accidents  The  capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never  be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner  which could jeopardize the user   s safety or the  safety of others     J_A208 book Seite 216 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    217  Driving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum  BAS assistance     To receive the benefit of the system you must apply  continuous full braking power during the stopping  sequence  Do not reduce brake pedal pressure     Once the brake pedal is released  the BAS is deactivated     The malfunction indicator lamp for the electronic  stability program  ESP  is combined with the BAS  malfunction indicator lamp     The BAS ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the  instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in  steering lock position 2 and should go out with the  engine running     If the BAS ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on  permanently while the engine is running  a ma
251. otor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966        Uniform tire quality grading    Quality grades can be found where applicable on the  tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum  section width  For example     All passenger vehicle tires must conform to federal  safety requirements in addition to these grades     Treadwear    The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  conditions on a specified government test course  For  example  a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half   1 1 2  times as well on the government course as a tire  graded 100  The relative performance of tires depends  upon the actual conditions of their use  however  and    may depart significantly from the norm due to  variations in driving habits  service practices and  differences in road characteristics and climate     Traction    The traction grades  from highest to lowest are AA  A  B   and C  Those grades represent the tire   s ability to stop  on wet pavement as measured under controlled  conditions on specified government test surfaces of  asphalt and concrete  A tire marked C may have poor  traction performance     Tread wear 200  Traction AA  Temperature A  Warning     The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  straightahead braking traction tests  and does not  include acceleration  cornering  hydroplaning  or  peak traction characteristics     J_A208 book Seite 324 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    325  Consumer informa
252. p     To switch the automatic climate control on again  press  U  P or  side of        J_A208 book Seite 124 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    125  Automatic climate control    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Air recirculation    This mode can be selected to temporarily reduce the  entry of annoying odors or dust into the vehicle   s  interior     Outside air is not supplied to the vehicle   s interior     To select  press O button     To cancel  press O button again     The system will automatically switch from recirculated  air to fresh air        after approx  5 minutes at outside temperatures  below approx  40  F  5  C          after approx  30 minutes at outside temperatures  above approx  40  F  5  C          after approx  5 minutes  if button S is pressed     If the windows should fog up from the inside  switch  from recirculated air back to fresh air     At high outside temperatures  the system automatically  engages the recirculated air mode thereby increasing  the cooling capacity performance  switching to partially  fresh air within 30 minutes     Residual engine heat utilization    With the engine switched off  it is possible to continue  heating the interior for a short while     Air volume and distribution are controlled  automatically     To select     Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 0 or  remove key     Press T button    This function select
253. perates with the BabySmartTM system  installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger  front airbag when it is properly installed   Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it  inflates in a crash  If this happens  serious or fatal  injury can result     According to accident statistics  children are safer  when properly restrained in the rear seating  positions than in the front seating positions   Infants and small children must ride in back seats  and be seated in an appropriate infant or child  restraint system  which is properly secured with  the vehicle   s seat belt  fully in accordance with the  child seat manufacturer   s instructions     Infants and small children should never share a  seat belt with another occupant  During an  accident  they could be crushed between the  occupant and seat belt     Children too big for child restraint systems must  ride in back seats using regular seat belts  Position  shoulder belt across chest and shoulder  not face or  neck  A booster seat may be necessary to achieve  proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs  to  the point where a lap shoulder belt fits properly  without one     When the child restraint is not in use  remove it  from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to  prevent the child restraint from becoming a  projectile in the event of an accident     Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle   even if the children are secured in a child restraint  system  Unsupervised children in a chil
254. r  panel first  Then push left end section toward  vehicle center  arrow 4  until it meets the left  opening  Insert end section in left opening  5      Push down on wind screen  6  until it locks in place     P65 00 2039 26    3    4    5    6    Warning     Check for secure locking by pulling up on the  wind screen     J_A208 book Seite 171 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    172  Wind screen    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Removal    Push left and right side buttons and remove wind  screen upward     Note     Do not insert foreign objects in openings for the  wind screen   P65 00 2009 26    Warning     To prevent personal injury  remove wind screen if  rear seats are to be occupied by passengers     J_A208 book Seite 172 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    173  Wind screen    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Storing    Pull end sections in direction of arrow  1  and fold in  direction of arrow  2      Place wind screen in its storage bag  and close the bag     Place bag in trunk  and secure it with the provided hook  and loop fasteners     When the wind screen is not in use  it should be stored  in the closed storage bag  to prevent possible damage to  the wind screen or luggage cargo     P65 00 2011 26    1    2    J_A208 book Seite 173 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    174  Wi
255. r contains  hot fluid and is under pressure         Using a rag  slowly open cap approximately  1 2 turn to relieve excess pressure  If opened  immediately  scalding hot fluid and steam will  be blown out under pressure         Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts   Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may  burn if it comes into contact with hot engine  parts     J_A208 book Seite 258 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    259  Engine compartment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Windshield washer headlamp cleaning system    1 Windshield washer headlamp cleaning system fluid  reservoir    Capacity approx  7 4 US qt  7 0 l      The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield  washer concentrate and water  or commercially  available premixed windshield washer solvent   antifreeze  depending on ambient temperatures      Windshield and headlamp washer  fluid mixing ratio    For temperatures above freezing     MB Windshield Washer Concentrate    S    and water     1 part    S    to 100 parts water   40 ml    S    to 1 gallon water      For temperature below freezing     MB Windshield Washer Concentrate    S    and  commercially available premixed windshield washer  solvent antifreeze     1 part    S    to 100 parts solvent   40 ml    S    to 1 gallon solvent      1    P82 35 2017 26    Warning     Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flammable  Do  not spill washer solvent
256. r more than  20 seconds  an emergency call is initiated automatically   See Tele Aid on page 182     Note     When you unlock the driver   s door with the mechanical  key  the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will  sound  To interrupt the alarm  insert the electronic key  in the steering lock or press button    or     on the  electronic key     1    J_A208 book Seite 43 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    44  Tow away alarm    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Tow away alarm    The switch is located in the center console     1 Press to switch off    2 Indicator lamp    Once the alarm system has been armed  the exterior  vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when  someone attempts to raise the vehicle     The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of  flashing exterior lamps  At the same time an alarm will  sound for 30 seconds  The alarm will stay on even if the  vehicle is immediately lowered  The tow away alarm  system is switched off automatically if the vehicle is  unlocked with the electronic key     If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds  an  emergency call is initiated automatically  See Tele Aid  on page 182     To prevent triggering the tow away alarm feature  switch  off the tow away alarm before towing the vehicle  or  when parking on a surface subject to movement  such  as a ferry or auto train     To do so  turn electronic key in steer
257. ram provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown   Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number     1 800 FOR MERCedes  in the USA   1 800 387 0100  in Canada     will be answered by Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day  365 days a year     For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box     Change of address or ownership    If you change your address  be sure to send in the    Change of Address Notice    found in the Service and Warranty  Information Booklet  or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center  in the USA  at 1 800   FOR MERCedes  or Customer Service  in Canada  at 1 800 387 0100  It is in your own interest that we can contact you  should the need arise     If you sell your Mercedes  please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator     If you bought this vehicle used  be sure to send in the    Notice of Purchase of Used Car    found in the Service and  Warranty Information Booklet  or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center  in the USA  at  1 800 FOR MERCedes  or Customer Service  in Canada  at 1 800 387 0100     J_A208 book Seite 10 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    11  Introduction    Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada    If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries  please be aware that         Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily avail
258. re  Index    4  Using the wrench  loosen but do not yet remove the  wheel bolts   5  Remove the protective cover from the jack support  tube opening by inserting the screwdriver  supplied  in the tool kit  in the opening and prying it out     The tube openings are located directly behind the  front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel  housings     P40 10 2479 26    J_A208 book Seite 267 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    268  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    6  Insert jack arm fully into the tube hole up to the  stop  Place jack on firm ground  Position the jack so  that it is always vertical  plumb line  as seen from  the side  see arrow   even if the vehicle is parked on  an incline     7  Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the  ground  Never start engine while vehicle is raised     8  Unscrew upper most wheel bolt and install  alignment bolt  1  supplied in the tool kit  Remove  the remaining bolts  Keep bolt threads protected  from dirt and sand     9  Remove wheel  Grip wheel from the sides  Keep  hands from beneath the wheels     P40 10 2481 26  P40 10 2482 26    1    J_A208 book Seite 268 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    269  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    10  Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub   Install whe
259. re  Index    In winter operation  the maximum effectiveness of the  antilock brake system  ABS  or of the electronic stability  program  ESP  can only be achieved with M S rated  radial ply tires and or snow chains recommended by  Mercedes Benz  Snow chains maximize performance     For driving instructions with snow chains  see page 211     Deep water    Caution     Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown  depth     If you must drive through deep water  drive slowly to  prevent water from entering the engine compartment or  passenger compartment  being ingested by the air  intake  possibly causing damage to electrical  components or wiring  to engine or transmission that is  not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     Block heater  Canada only     The engine is equipped with a block heater     The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center     Passenger compartment    Traveling abroad    Abroad  there is a widely spread Mercedes Benz service  network at your disposal  If you plan to travel into areas  which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz  Center directory  you should request pertinent  information from your authorized Mercedes Benz  Center     Warning     Always fasten items being carried as securely as  possible     In an accident  during hard braking or sudden  maneuvers  loose items will be thrown around  inside the vehicle  and cause injury to vehicle  occupants unless the items are securely faste
260. re of the windows should now be  restored     Warning     When leaving the vehicle  always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock and lock the  vehicle  Do not leave children unattended in the  vehicle  or with access to an unlocked vehicle   Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause  serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 147 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    148  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Power windows     operated with soft top switch    Soft top switch is located on center console     In addition to the power window switches  the windows  can also be opened or closed with the soft top switch     The soft top handle must be in the locked position to  operate the power windows     Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 2     To open     Lift soft top switch quickly twice and hold     To close     Press soft top switch quickly twice and hold     Release switch when windows are in desired position     Warning     When closing the windows  be sure that there is no  danger of anyone being harmed by the closing  procedure     When leaving the vehicle  always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  and lock the  vehicle  Do not leave children unattended in the  vehicle  or with access to an unlocked vehicle   Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause  serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 148
261. red  If the matter is not handled to your  satisfaction  please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Center management  or if  necessary contact us at the following addresses     In the USA   Customer Assistance Center  Mercedes Benz USA  LLC  One Mercedes Drive  Montvale  NJ 07645 0350  In Canada   Customer Relations Department  Mercedes Benz Canada  Inc   849 Eglinton Avenue East  Toronto  Ontario  M4G 2L5    J_A208 book Seite 14 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    15  Introduction    For the USA only   The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49  Code of U S  Federal Regulations   Part 575 pursuant to the    National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966        Reporting Safety Defects    If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or  death  you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration   NHTSA  in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA  LLC   If NHTSA receives similar complaints  it may open an investigation  and if it finds that a safety  defect exists in a group of vehicles  it may order a recall and remedy campaign  However  NHTSA  cannot become involved in individual problems between you  your dealer  or Mercedes Benz USA   LLC   To contact NHTSA  you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or write  to  NHTSA  U S  Department of Transportation  Washington  D C  20590  You can also obtain other  information abo
262. red position     Illuminated vanity mirrors    With the visor engaged in its inner mounting  the lamp  is switched on by opening the cover     The lamp goes out automatically after approximately  5 minutes     Warning     Do not use the vanity mirror while driving     J_A208 book Seite 150 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    151  Interior equipment    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Interior    Storage compartments  armrest and cup holder    Glove box    1 Unlocking  Turn mechanical key to vertical position  and remove     2 Locking  Turn mechanical key to the right and  remove     3 Opening  Pull on handle     The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the  mechanical key  See page 25 for instructions on how to  remove the mechanical key from the electronic key  e g   for valet parking service      Warning     To help avoid personal injury during a collision or  sudden maneuver  exercise care when stowing  things  Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if  possible  Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than  the seat backs  Do not place anything on the shelf  below the rear window     Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects     Warning     Keep compartment lids closed  This will help to  prevent stored objects from being thrown about  and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident  and sudden maneuvers     P68 00 2067 26    3    1    2    J_A208 book Seite 151 Donnerstag
263. removed from the ignition  The radio is  switched on again when the ignition key is turned to  position 1 or 2     Note     The radio can also be switched on even if the ignition  key is not inserted  but will switch itself off  automatically after one hour to conserve vehicle battery  power     Adjusting the volume    Turn the control knob   turning the knob clockwise will  increase the volume  counterclockwise will decrease the  volume     Audio functions    The AUD key is used to select the BASS  TREBLE and  BALANCE functions  Settings for bass and treble are  stored separately for the cassette and CD modes  Tone  level settings are identified by the vertical bars  The  center  flat  setting is shown by one longer bar in the  center of the display     Bass    Press the AUD key repeatedly  until    BASS    appears in the  display     Treble    Press the AUD key repeatedly  until    TREBLE    appears in the  display     Press the         key to increase  or the         key to decrease the level     J_A208 book Seite 131 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    132  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Fader1    Press the AUD key repeatedly  until    FADER    appears on the  display  Press the    R    key to  move the sound to the rear  speakers or the    F    key to  move the sound to the front speakers     Balance    Press the AUD key repeatedly  until    BALANCE    appear
264. restraint  up for approximately 5 seconds     Insert the head restraint and push it down to the stop     Adjust head restraint to the desired position     For positioning of head restraints see also power seats   front on page 45  and head restraints  rear on page 53     Warning     For your protection  drive only with properly  positioned head restraints     Adjust head restraint to support the back of the  head approximately at ear level     Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head  restraints  Head restraints are intended to help  reduce injuries during an accident     J_A208 book Seite 51 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    52  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Roll bar and head restraints  rear    The rear head restraints are integrated in the roll bar     The roll bar will be automatically raised in an accident  or in a potentially dangerous driving situation  A ratchet  noise can be heard when the roll bar is automatically  raised     The roll bar can be lowered again after an automatic  deployment by pressing the upper half of the roll bar  switch  for at least 8 seconds  until the roll bar drive  mechanism audibly engages  Then press the lower half  of the switch to lower the roll bar     If the roll bar was raised using the switch  it will be  automatically lowered when activating the soft top  switch     Warning     Raising or lowering of the roll bar could
265. rger after the  battery has been disconnected from the vehicle   s  electrical circuit     Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and  connect last     When removing and connecting the battery  always  make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the  electronic key is in steering lock position 0  The battery  and its filler caps must always be securely installed  when the vehicle is in operation  During removal and  installation always protect the disconnected battery  positive     terminal with the cover attached to the  battery     While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps  must not be loosened or detached  otherwise the  generator and other electronic components would be  damaged     Notes     After reconnecting the battery also set the clock  see  page 106  resynchronize the front seats  see page 49    front seat head restraints  see page 49   the express  feature of the power windows  see page 147   and the  electronic stability program  ESP   see page 221      If the soft top is in a half open position  it also has to be  synchronized  To do so  raise and lock soft top manually   see page 291      Battery recycling    Batteries contain material that can harm the  environment with improper disposal     Large 12 Volt storage batteries contain lead     Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of  disposal     Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old  batteries for recycling     J_A208 book Seite 273 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2
266. rinflating tires can  result in sudden deflation  blowout  because they  are more likely to become punctured or damaged  by road debris  potholes etc   Follow recommended  inflation pressures     Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified  vehicle capacity weight  as indicated by the label  on the driver   s door latch post   Overloading the  tires can overheat them  possibly causing a  blowout     Warning     Failure to follow these instructions can result in  severe injury or death     Never lean over batteries while connecting  you  might get injured     Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid  Do not allow  this fluid to come in contact with eyes  skin or  clothing  In case it does  immediately flush affected  area with water and seek medical help if necessary     A battery will also produce hydrogen gas  which is  flammable and explosive  Keep flames or sparks  away from battery  avoid improper connection of  jumper cables  smoking etc      J_A208 book Seite 272 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    273  Battery    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Therefore  we strongly recommend that you have the  battery charge checked frequently  and corrected if  necessary  especially if you use the vehicle less than  approximately 200 miles  300 km  per month   mostly for short distance trips  or if it is not used for  long periods of time     Only charge a battery with a battery cha
267. riving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Depending on your vehicle   s equipment  you may use  the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to call  up  control and set the following systems in the  multifunction display     1 Trip and main odometer  see page 92    Vehicle speed  see page 92  Flexible service system  FSS   see page 109  Engine oil level indicator  see page 112    2 Audio systems  see page 93    Radio  see page 93  CD player  optional   see page 94  Cassette player  see page 95    3 Navigation system  optional   see page 101    4 Malfunction message memory  see page 104    5 Individual settings  see page 106    6 Trip computer  see page 102    After start  After reset  Fuel tank content    7 Telephone  if so equipped   see page 96    Press the    or    button repeatedly until the  required system is displayed     Pressing the    button advances the display to the  next system     Pressing the    button returns the display to the  previous system     You may call up additional displays within some of these  categories by pressing the j or k button     Warning     A driver   s attention to the road must always be his   her primary focus when driving     For your safety and the safety of others  selecting  features through the multifunction steering wheel  should only be done by the driver when traffic and  road conditions permit it to be done safely   Programming individual settings in the system can  only be made while the veh
268. rning messages                                             237  Adjusting headlamp aim                                                285  Adjusting telescoping steering column                         77  Air conditioner refrigerant                                            320  Air distribution                                                               124  Air volume                                                                       124  Airbag deactivation system                                             64  Airbag OFF indicator lamp                                            232  Airbags                                                                               67  Alarm system                                                               43  44  Antenna  Removal                                                                       298  Anticorrosion antifreeze                     212  258  318  323  Antiglare night position                                                  78  Antilock brake system  ABS                                          218  Malfunction indicator lamp                                      231  Antitheft alarm system                                                    43  Aquaplaning                                                                    209    Armrest  rear bench                                                        156  Ashtray  Center console  front                                                 154  Audio system          
269. rs  See page 92     Press button j or k on the multifunction  steering wheel repeatedly until the    MEASUREMENT  CORRECT     ONLY IF VEH  LEVEL    engine oil level  indicator appears  This indicator is only a reminder   Measurement can be cancelled by pressing button j  or k if the vehicle is not parked on level ground  An  incorrect reading will be displayed if you do not cancel  the measurement  Move the vehicle to level ground and  measure again     The electronic key in steering lock is not in position 2 if  the    ENGINE OIL LEVEL     SWITCH ON IGNITION     message appears     The    ENGINE OIL LEVEL     MEASURING NOW     message is displayed after approximately 3 seconds     J_A208 book Seite 112 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    113  Engine oil level indicator    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    One of the following messages will subsequently appear  on the indicator        ENGINE OIL LEVEL     O K      No oil needs to be added        ENGINE OIL LEVEL     ADD 1 0 QUART      Canada  1 0 L        ENGINE OIL LEVEL     ADD 1 5 QUART      Canada  1 5 L        ENGINE OIL LEVEL     ADD 2 0 QUART      Canada  2 0 L     See page 256 for instructions on adding engine oil        ENGINE OIL LEVEL     REDUCE OIL LEVEL     Do not overfill the engine     Excessive oil must be siphoned or drained off  It could  cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not  covered by the Merced
270. s  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Headlamps  taillamps  turn signal lenses    Use a mild car wash detergent  such as Mercedes Benz  approved Car Shampoo  with plenty of water     To prevent scratches  never apply strong force and use  only a soft  non scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses   Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or  sponge     Window cleaning    Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces  An  automotive glass cleaner is recommended     Note     For safety reasons  switch off wiper and remove  electronic key from steering lock before cleaning the  windshield  otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly  turn on and cause injury     Plastic and rubber parts    Do not use oil or wax on these parts     Wiper blade    Clean the wiper blade rubber with a clean cloth and  detergent solution     Note     For safety reasons  remove electronic key from steering  lock before cleaning the wiper blade  otherwise the  wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury     Light alloy wheels    Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for  regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels     If possible  clean wheels once a week with Mercedes   Benz approved Wheel Care  using a soft bristle brush  and a strong spray of water     Follow instructions on container     Note     Use only acid free cleaning materials  The acid could  lead to corrosion     J_A208 book Seite 305 Donnerstag  31
271. s  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Scan tuning    Press the SC key  Each strong  receivable station on the band  selected will be tuned in for  8 seconds  The first scan will  tune only the stations with a  high signal strength  The second scan will tune every  receivable station  By pressing either the        or  buttons  or the    SC    key the scan mode  can be cancelled     Station memory    Ten stations can be stored in  the AM and FM bands via the  alpha numeric keypad  The     0    button corresponds to  location 10  Weatherband   WB  channels 1 to 7 can be retrieved via the alpha   numeric keypad and are preset at the factory     Storing stations    Hold the number button down for approximately  2 seconds  The currently displayed frequency is stored  on the selected station button  The storage procedure is  confirmed by a short signal tone     Retrieving a station from memory    Press the desired station button     Direct frequency input  AM and FM only     Select the band  Press the      button and enter the  desired frequency using the  alpha numeric keypad   Frequencies outside of the  frequency ranges  frequencies specified on page 133   will not be accepted  The frequency input mode is  cancelled if no button is pressed within 4 seconds     J_A208 book Seite 134 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    135  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  clus
272. s in  the display     Press the    L    key to move the  sound to the left speaker or the    R    key to move the  sound to the right speaker     1  not available on all models    Centering all audio functions    Push and hold down the     AUD    key  All audio  functions  bass  treble   balance and fader  are set to  center or flat positions  and  the volume is adjusted to a pre set level     J_A208 book Seite 132 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    133  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Radio mode    Selecting radio mode    Press  button     Selecting the band    Press the key located below  the desired band  The band  selected is shown in the top  line of the display     Manual tuning    Press either the  or  button  Step by step tuning in  ascending or descending  order of frequency will take  place     The first three tuning steps will take place without  muting  The radio will then be muted and high speed  tuning will take place until the button is released   The following tuning intervals will be shown on the  display     Seek tuning    Press either the  or  button  The radio will tune  to the next receivable station     Frequency ranges   FM  87 9   107 9 MHz    AM  530   1710 kHz    WB  approx  162 MHz    FM  200 kHz    AM  10 kHz    WB  Channels 1 7    J_A208 book Seite 133 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    134  Audio system    Technical  data  Instrument
273. s in some systems by  pressing the j or k button     Note     The displays in the multifunction display can be set to  German  English  French  Italian or Spanish language   See the    TEXT    individual setting on page 106 for  instructions on changing the language setting     The displays for the audio systems  radio  CD player   cassette player  will appear in English  regardless of the  language selected     J_A208 book Seite 91 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    92  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Trip and main odometer and sub menu  1 Trip and main odometer  See page 87 for instructions on resetting the trip  odometer     2 Vehicle speed    3 FSS  Flexible service system   see page 109     4 Engine oil level indicator  see page 112     Press    or    button repeatedly until the trip and  main odometer display  1  appears     Press the j or k button repeatedly until the  required display  2  3  4  1  appears     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     J_A208 book Seite 92 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    93  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Audio systems    Radio    1 Audio system is switched off     2 The radio is switched on     3 Wave b
274. seat is pushed against an  occupant or object  The seat will slide forward  stop  and  make 3 attempts sliding backward     To halt the automatic process  activate the power seat  switch  Investigate and correct the cause of interruption   Now use memory button or power seat switch to bring  seat into desired position     The backrest release lever  1  also serves as a rest for  the front seat belt  bringing it within easy reach     Warning     When leaving the vehicle always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  and lock your  vehicle     The power seats can also be operated with the  driver   s or passenger door open  Do not leave  children unattended in the vehicle or with access  to an unlocked vehicle  Unsupervised use of vehicle  equipment may cause serious personal injury     Never place hands under seat or near any moving  parts during a seat adjustment procedure     J_A208 book Seite 54 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    55  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Multicontour seat   optional  standard on model CLK 55 AMG     Some models may be equipped with multicontour seats   These seats have movable seat cushions  and inflatable  air cushions built into the backrest to provide additional  lumbar and side support     We recommend to adjust the multicontour seat in the  following order     1 Seat cushion depth  Slide the switch fore or aft until your legs
275. ssette player                              95  Telephone                                           96  Telephone book                             96  Redialing                                        98  Incoming call                               100  Navigation system                            101  Trip computer                                  102  Malfunction warning  message memory                       104  Individual settings                          106  Setting the audio volume               108  Flexible service system   FSS                                              109  Engine oil level indicator                112  Engine oil consumption                  113  Exterior lamp switch                       114  Night security illumination           115    Headlamp cleaning system            116  Combination switch                        117  Hazard warning flasher  switch                                           119  Automatic climate control              120  Display and controls                   122  Basic setting                                 122  Economy                                        123  Special settings                            123  Rear window defroster                124  Air recirculation                          125  Residual engine heat  utilization                                      125  Dust filter                                      126  Audio and telephone   operation                                      127  Power windows           
276. ssue a numbered incident report   Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response  Center     The Response Center will then attempt to covertly  contact the vehicle   s Tele Aid system  Once the vehicle  is located  the Response Center will contact the local  Law Enforcement and you  The vehicle   s location will  only be provided to Law Enforcement     Info Services  optional  except Canada    only vehicles with COMAND     Info Services categories include news  sports  stocks   weather and calendar reminders  Choices can be  selected via www mbusa com or by calling 1 800 FOR   MERcedes     To request Info Services press the SVC button on the  COMAND system  then select    SEND NEW REQUEST  FOR INFO SERVICE        NEW INFO SERVICE REQUEST  TRANSMITTED    will appear in the COMAND display  and call status messages will appear in the  multifunction display     Once information is available  the message    NEW INFO  RECEIVED   READ LATER WHEN STOPPED     will  appear  Select    Yes     With the vehicle stopped in a safe  location press SVC  then select    View Info Service of  mm dd yyyy hh mm     Messages will be retained for  30 minutes once the ignition is switched off     Important     Tele Aid utilizes the cellular network for  communication and the GPS  Global Positioning  System  satellites for vehicle location  If either of these  signals are unavailable  the Tele Aid system may not  function and if this occurs  assistance must be  summoned by other means     Warning  
277. stem  SRS                                                                  58  Seats  Backrest                                                                         54  Front seat adjustment                                                 45  Heated                                                                            56  Memory                                                                         48  Multicontour                                                                 55  Power seat                                                                     45  Selective locking  See Central locking system                                        29  Service indicator  See Flexible service system  FSS                            109    J_A208 book Seite 334 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    335  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Setting the audio volume                                               108  Shelf below rear window                                               250  Side marker lamp                                                           284  Snow chains                                                                      211  Soft top                                                                              162  Emergency operation                                                291  Lowering                                                          
278. sults in  applying the advantages of the ABS  namely braking  power and ability to steer the vehicle     In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep  continuous full pressure on the brake pedal  In this  manner only can the ABS be most effective     On slippery road surfaces  the ABS will respond even  with light brake pedal pressure because of the  increased likelihood of locking wheels  The pulsating  brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road  conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra  care while driving     Warning     Do not pump the brake pedal  rather use firm   steady brake pedal pressure  Pumping the brake  pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly  reduces braking effectiveness     J_A208 book Seite 218 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    219  Driving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    ABS control    The ABS malfunction indicator lamp   in the  instrument cluster comes on with the electronic key in  steering lock position 2 and should go out with the  engine running     When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the  instrument cluster comes on while the engine is  running  it indicates that the ABS has detected a  malfunction and has switched off  In this case  the brake  system functions in the usual manner  but without  antilock assistance     For ABS malfunction indicator lamp  see page 231     With the ABS malfunctioning  the
279. t                                                                         54  Power windows                                                                146  Express opening and closing                                   147  Opening and closing                                                    31  Operated with soft top switch                                  148  Synchronizing                                                            147  Problems with your vehicle                                             14  Product information                                                           7    R    Radio  See Audio                                                                     133  Radio transmitters                                                          178  Rain sensor                                                                       118    J_A208 book Seite 333 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    334  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Rear view mirrors  Exterior                                                                          79  Inside                                                                             78  Rear window defroster                                                   124  Remote control                                                                  27  Battery replacement                                                  288  R
280. t     The emergency trunk lid release button  1  does not  open the trunk lid  if the vehicle battery is discharged or  disconnected     Illumination of the emergency release button  1      The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the  trunk     The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the  trunk     1    J_A208 book Seite 42 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    43  Antitheft alarm system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Antitheft alarm system    1 Indicator lamp in switch located in center console    The antitheft alarm is automatically armed or disarmed  with the remote control by locking or unlocking the  vehicle     The antitheft alarm is armed within approx  10 seconds  after locking the vehicle     A blinking lamp  1  indicates that the alarm is armed     Operation     Once the alarm system has been armed  the exterior  vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when  someone         opens a door         opens the trunk         opens the hood         attempts to raise the vehicle     The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of  flashing exterior lamps  At the same time an alarm will  sound for 30 seconds  The alarm will stay on even if the  activating element  a door  for example  is immediately  closed  The antitheft alarm system is switched off  automatically if the vehicle is unlocked with the  electronic key  If the alarm stays on fo
281. t be replaced before continuing  to operate the vehicle  Otherwise  the engine will overheat due to  an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the  engine  Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message  displayed  Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is  not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     During severe operating conditions and stop and go city  traffic  the coolant temperature may rise close to the red  marking     The engine should not be operated with the coolant  temperature in the red zone  Doing so may cause  serious engine damage which is not covered by the  Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     Line 1  Line 2    COOLANT TEMP   VISIT WORKSHOP 1    Warning     Driving when your engine is badly overheated can  cause some fluids which may have leaked into the  engine compartment to catch fire  You could be  seriously burned     Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious  burns and can occur just by opening the engine  hood  Stay away from the engine if you see or hear  steam coming from it     Turn off the engine  get out of the vehicle and do  not stand near the vehicle until it cools down     J_A208 book Seite 241 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    242  Malfunction and warning messages    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    LIGHTING SYSTEM  When the message appears after starting the engine  or  if it comes on while dr
282. t head restraint positions may be  programmed into memory     Together with the driver   s seat position you can store  the exterior rear view mirror positions     After the seat head restraint and exterior rear view  mirrors are positioned  push memory button  6    release  and within 3 seconds push position button    1      A second and third set of positions for the same seat   head restraint and exterior rear view mirrors can be  programmed into memory by pushing first memory  button  6  and then    2     respectively    3        Note     See page 79 for instructions on adjustment of mirrors     J_A208 book Seite 48 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    49  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Recalling    To recall a seat head restraint and exterior rear view  mirror position  push and hold position button    1        2     or    3    until seat head restraint and exterior rear view  mirror movement has stopped  The seat head restraint  and exterior rear view mirror movement stops when the  position button is released     Caution     Do not operate the power seats using the memory  button if the backrest is in an excessively reclined  position  Doing so could cause damage to front or rear  seats     First move the backrest to an upright position     Synchronizing power seats and head restraints    If the power supply was interrupted  battery  disconnected or empty   the pow
283. ta  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index        Pregnant women should also use a lap   shoulder belt  The lap belt portion should be  positioned as low as possible on the hips to  avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen         Never place your feet on the instrument panel  or on the seat  Always keep both feet on the  floor in front of the seat     Warning     USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY     Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  the front seat  except in a Mercedes Benz  authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat   which operates with the BabySmartTM system  installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger  front airbag when it is properly installed   Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it  inflates in a crash  If this happens  serious or fatal  injury will result     According to accident statistics  children are safer  when properly restrained in the rear seating  positions than in the front seating positions   Infants and small children must ride in back seats  and be seated in an appropriate infant or child  restraint system  which is properly secured with  the vehicle   s seat belt  fully in accordance with the  child seat manufacturer   s instructions     A child   s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  significantly increased if the child restraints are  not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  not properly secured in the child restraint     Chil
284. ta  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Safety guidelines for the seat belt   emergency tensioning retractor and airbag    Warning     Accident research shows that the safest place for  children in an automobile is in the rear seat   Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or  under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle   you must properly use a BabySmartTM child  restraint which will turn off the passenger side  front airbag  BabySmartTM will not  however  turn  off the passenger   s side impact airbag     It should be noted however that there is a  possibility for a side airbag related injury if  occupants  especially children  are not properly  seated or restrained when next to a side airbag  which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in  order to do its job     To help avoid the possibility of injury  please follow  these guidelines   1  occupants  especially  children  should never place their bodies or lean  their heads in the area of the door where the side  airbag inflates  This could result in serious  injuries or death should the side airbag be  activated   2  always sit upright  properly use the  seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or  child restraint system for all children 12 years old  or under  and  3  always wear seat belts properly     Warning         Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly  stressed in an accident must be replaced and  their anchor
285. tability  program                                        245  REMOVE KEY                              245  WASHER FLUID                           246  TELE AID                                      247    Practical hints    First aid kit                                      250  Shelf below rear window               250  Stowing things in  the vehicle                                   250  Luggage cover                                  250  Fuses                                                 252  Hood                                                  254  Checking engine oil level              256    Automatic transmission  fluid level                                    257  Coolant level                                    257  Adding coolant                            258  Windshield washer   headlamp  cleaning system                         259  Windshield and headlamp  washer fluid mixing ratio         259  Spare wheel  vehicle tools   storage compartment                260  Vehicle jack                                      261  Wheels                                             262  Tire replacement                        262  Rotating wheels                          263  Spare wheel                                     264  Changing wheels                            266  Tire inflation pressure                   271  Battery                                              272  Jump starting                                   274  Towing the vehicle                          27
286. tail  buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs   1  the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a  condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven  that defect or malfunction has  been subject to repair two or more times  and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA  LLC in writing of the  need for its repair and have given us a direct opportunity to perform a repair ourselves   2  the same substantial defect  or malfunction of a less serious nature than category  1  has been subject to repair four or more times and you have  directly notified us of the need for its repair and given us the opportunity to repair ourselves  or  3  the vehicle is out  of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of  more than 30 calender days  Written notification should be sent to us  not a dealer  at Mercedes Benz USA  LLC   Customer Assistance Center  One Mercedes Drive  Montvale  NJ 07645 0350     Maintenance    The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals     Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for  service  The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you     J_A208 book Seite 9 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    10  Introduction    Roadside assistance    The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Prog
287. ter display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Cassette mode    Note     Vehicles equipped with the COMAND system do not  come with a factory installed cassette mechanism   A standard 1 8    stereo phono plug for auxiliary audio  input  located in glove box  is provided for connection of  a portable battery operated cassette player or any other  portable device which uses a headphone output  Please  refer to the COMAND operating manual for information  concerning the activation of the audio input     Playing cassettes    Press the    TAPE    button  When the eject  EJ  key is  pressed  the display folds down and the cassette slot  becomes visible  Push the cassette into the slot until it  engages  The cassette will be pulled in automatically     Note     Do not press directly on the radio display face     Return the display panel to its normal position by  folding it back up and pressing gently on the display  frame to lock in place     When playing mono recorded tapes  e g  books  through  a stereo system the sound from one track might bleed to  the other track  despite setting the balance to the full  left or full right speakers     Important     If the display is in the down position for more than  20 seconds  2 successive beeps will be heard  This will  continue at 5 second intervals until the display is  returned to its normal position     J_A208 book Seite 135 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    136  Audio system    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operatio
288. thorized  Mercedes Benz Center before the onset of winter         Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil  which is not approved for winter operation  For  viscosity  SAE CCMC class  and filling quantity  see  page 318         Check engine coolant anticorrosion antifreeze  concentration         Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp  cleaning system  Add MB Concentrate    S    to a  premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze  which is formulated for below freezing temperatures  see page 259         Test battery  Battery capacity drops with decreasing  ambient temperature  A well charged battery helps  to ensure that the engine can be started  even at low  ambient temperatures         Tires  We recommend M S rated radial ply tires on  all four wheels for the winter season  Observe  permissible maximum speed for M S rated  radial ply tires and the legal speed limit     Warning     If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow  make sure  that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and  from around the vehicle with engine running   Otherwise  deadly carbon monoxide  CO  gases may  enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness  and death     To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation  open a  window slightly on the side of the vehicle not  facing the wind     J_A208 book Seite 212 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    213  Driving instructions    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car ca
289. tion    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Temperature    The temperature grades are A  the highest   B  and C   representing the tire   s resistance to the generation of  heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  test wheel  Sustained high temperature can cause the  material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life   and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire  failure  The grade C corresponds to a level of  performance which all passenger vehicle tires must  meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard  No  109  Grades B and A represent higher levels of  performance on the laboratory test wheel than the  minimum required by law     Warning     The temperature grade for this tire is established  for a tire that is properly inflated and not  overloaded  Excessive speed  underinflation  or  excessive loading  either separately or in  combination  can cause excessive heat build up  and possible tire failure     J_A208 book Seite 325 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    326  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Index    A    ABS  Antilock brake system                                          218  Malfunction indicator lamp                                      231  ABS SYSTEM   malfunction  and wa
290. to a malfunction of the vehicle   s electronic  system  possibly resulting in an accident and  personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 178 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    179  The first 1 000 miles    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    The first 1 000 miles  1 500 km     The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the  break in period  the more satisfied you will be with its  performance later on  Therefore  drive your vehicle  during the first 1 000 miles  1 500 km  at moderate  vehicle and engine speeds     During this period  avoid heavy loads  full throttle  driving  and excessive engine speeds     Avoid accelerating by kickdown  It is not recommended  to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear   We recommend that you select positions    3        2    or    1     only at moderate speeds  for hill driving      After 1 000 miles  1 500 km  speeds may be gradually  increased to the permissible maximum     Maintenance    We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle  serviced by your authorized Mercedes Benz Center  in  accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called  for by the FSS     Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance  with the Service Booklet at the designated times   mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by  the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty     For information on the Flexible service system  FSS    see page 109    
291. to have the  flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate     Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel  mounted     Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow  on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward  movement     For rim and tire specifications  refer to    Technical Data      page 314      Warning     The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only  Use  for over a total of 12 000 miles  20 000 km    aggregate of all uses  may cause wheel rim failure  leading to an accident and possible injuries     The dimensions of the spare wheel are different  from those of the road wheels for the rear axle   CLK 320 with Sport Package  The dimensions of  the spare wheel are different from those of the road  wheels   As a result  the vehicle handling  characteristics change when driving with a spare  wheel mounted on the rear axle     The spare wheel should only be used temporarily   and replaced with a regular road wheel as quick as  possible     J_A208 book Seite 265 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    266  Tires  Wheels    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Changing wheels  Move vehicle to a level area which is a safe distance  from the roadway     1  Set parking brake and turn on hazard warning  flasher     2  Move selector lever to position    P    and turn off  engine     3  Prevent vehicle from rolling away by blocking  wheels with wheel chocks  
292. tored malfunction messages will now be displayed  in order  See page 234 for malfunction and warning  messages  Display  2  will reappear after you have  scanned all the malfunction messages     Should any malfunction or warning messages be stored  while driving  they will reappear in the display  2  when  the electronic key in steering lock is turned to position 0  or removed from the steering lock     J_A208 book Seite 104 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    105  Multifunction steering wheel  multifunction display    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Specific malfunctions can be recalled by pressing  button J  Each malfunction or warning message must  be acknowledged by pressing button J  Once all  messages are cancelled  the odometer display should  reappear     Pressing the J button in the instrument cluster  immediately switches to the next malfunction message     The malfunction message memory will be cleared when  the electronic key is turned in the steering lock to  position 1 or 2  Should any subsequent malfunctions  occur  they will be displayed in the malfunction  message memory     Pressing the    or    button displays the next or  previous system     Important     Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated  for certain systems and displayed to a low level of detail     The malfunction and warning messages are simply a  reminder with respect to the operation of 
293. tory with a  coolant providing freeze protection to approximately   22  F   30  C  and corrosion protection     If the antifreeze mixture is effective to  22  F   30  C   the  boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling  system is reached at approximately 266  F  130  C      The coolant solution must be used year round to provide  the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the  boil over protection  You should have it replaced every  3 years     To provide the important corrosion protection  the  solution must be at least 45  anticorrosion antifreeze   equals a freeze protection to approx    22  F   30  C    If  you use a solution that is more than 55  anticorrosion   antifreeze  freeze protection to approx    49  F   45  C       J_A208 book Seite 322 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    323  Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc     Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    the engine temperature will increase due to the lower  heat transfer capability of the solution  Therefore  do not  use more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze     If the coolant level is low  water and MB anticorrosion   antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper  level  have cooling system checked for signs of leakage      The water in the cooling system must meet minimum  requirements  which are usually satisfied by normal  drinking water  If your are not sure about the water  qua
294. tters                      178  The first 1 000 miles   1 500 km                                   179  Maintenance                                    179  Catalytic converter                         180  Emission control                              181  Tele Aid                                            182  Steering lock                                    192  Starting and turning off  the engine                                   194  Automatic transmission                195  Parking brake                                  204    Driving instructions                       205  Drive sensibly      save fuel                                       205  Drinking and driving                 205  Pedals                                           205  Power assistance                         206  Brakes                                           206  Driving off                                    207  Parking                                         208  Tires                                              208  Snow chains                                 211  Winter driving  instructions                                  211  Deep water                                    213  Passenger compartment             213  Traveling abroad                          213    Cruise control                                   214  Brake assist system   BAS                                              216  Antilock brake system   ABS                                              218  Electronic stabilit
295. uel reserve warning                                                      230  Fuels  coolants  lubricants etc    capacities                318  Fuse box                                                                           252  Fuses  electrical                                                               252    G    Garage door opener                                                        158  Gasoline  Additives                                                                      322  Fuel requirements                                                     321  Premium unleaded                                                    321  General notes on the central locking system               26  Global locking  See Central locking system                                        29  Glove box                                                                          151    J_A208 book Seite 330 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    331  Index    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    H    Hazard warning flasher switch                                     119  Head restraints  Front                                                                               51  Rear                                                                                52  Removal                                                                          51  Headlamp cleaning system                                      
296. uments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Automatic central locking    The central locking switch also operates the automatic  central locking     With the automatic central locking system activated  the  doors and trunk are locked at vehicle speeds of approx   9 mph  15 km h  or more  The fuel filler flap remains  unlocked     To activate     With electronic key in steering lock position 2 hold  upper portion of switch  1  for a minimum of 5 seconds     To deactivate     With electronic key in steering lock position 2 hold  lower portion of switch  2  for a minimum of 5 seconds     Notes     If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch  after activating the automatic central locking  and  neither door is opened  then the doors remain unlocked  even at vehicle speeds of approx  9 mph  15 km h  or  more     If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of approx   9 mph  15 km h  or less with the automatic central  locking activated  the door will again be automatically  locked at speeds of approx  9 mph  15 km h  or more     Important     When towing the vehicle  or with the vehicle on a  dynamometer test stand  please  note the following     With the automatic central locking activated and the  electronic key in steering lock position 2  the vehicle  doors will lock if the left front wheel as well as the right  rear wheel spin at vehicle speeds of approx  9 mph   15 km h  or more     To prevent the veh
297. urn front wheels towards the road curb     6  Turn the electronic key to steering lock  position 0 and remove     7  Take the electronic key and lock vehicle when  leaving     Warning     If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride  disturbance  or you suspect that possible damage to  your vehicle has occurred  you should turn on the  hazard warning flashers  carefully slow down  and  drive with caution to an area which is a safe  distance from the roadway     Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible  damage  If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe  have  it towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or  tire dealer for repairs     J_A208 book Seite 208 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    209  Driving instructions    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Specified tire pressures must be maintained  This  applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high  loads  e g  high speeds  heavy loads  high ambient  temperatures      Aquaplaning    Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road   aquaplaning may occur  even at low speeds and with  new tires  Reduce vehicle speed  avoid track grooves in  the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain     Warning     Do not allow your tires to wear down too far  As  tread depth approaches 1 16 in  1 5 mm   the  adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply  reduced     Depending upon the weather and or road surface   c
298. urned from steering  lock position 0 to positions 1 or 2  malfunctions in the  crash sensor are detected and indicated  the    SRS     indicator lamp stays on longer than 4 seconds or does  not come on      Have the system checked at your authorized  Mercedes Benz Center immediately     In the operational mode  after the indicator lamp has  gone out following the initial check  interruptions or  short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the  driver and front passenger seat belt buckle harnesses   and low voltage in the entire system are detected and  indicated     Front airbags    The driver and front passenger front airbags are  designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts  exceeding a preset threshold     The front passenger airbag deploys only if the front  passenger seat is occupied and the indicator lamp on  the center console is not illuminated     Note     Heavy objects on the front passenger seat can appear to  the    SRS    to indicate the presence of an occupant in  that seat which causes the passenger front airbag to  deploy in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold     Warning     In the event a malfunction of the    SRS    is indicated  as outlined above  the    SRS    may not be  operational  For your safety  we strongly  recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes   Benz Center immediately to have the system  checked  otherwise the    SRS    may not be activated  when needed in an accident  which could result in  serious or fatal inj
299. ury  or it might deploy  unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also  result in injury     J_A208 book Seite 69 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    70  Restraint systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Side impact airbags    The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in  certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold  Only  the side impact airbag on the impacted side of the  vehicle deploys     The side impact airbag for the front passenger deploys  only if the front passenger seat is occupied     Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a  properly positioned and fastened seat belt     Note     Heavy objects on front passenger seat can cause the  side impact airbag to deploy in a crash     Important     Airbags are designed to activate only in certain  frontal  front airbags  impacts  or side  side impact  airbags  impacts which exceed preset thresholds     Only during these types of impacts  if of sufficient  severity to meet the deployment thresholds  will  they provide their supplemental protection     The driver and passenger should always wear their  seat belts  otherwise it is not possible for the airbags  to provide their intended supplemental protection     In cases of other frontal impacts  angled impacts   roll overs  other side impacts  rear collisions  or  other accidents in which the airbags are not  designed to deploy  the airbags wi
300. uster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Malfunction and indicator lamps  in the instrument cluster    General information     If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up  during the bulb self check when turning the electronic  key in steering lock to position 2  have it checked and  replaced if necessary     On board diagnostic system  Check engine malfunction indicator lamp    Engine malfunction indicator lamp  If the     CHECK ENGINE    malfunction indicator  lamp comes on when the engine is running   it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management  system  emission control system  systems which impact  emissions  or the fuel cap is not closed tight  check the  fuel cap   If the    CHECK ENGINE    lamp is illuminated  continuously and the vehicle is driving normally  you  may still drive the vehicle  however  in all cases  we  recommend that you have the system checked at your  authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible     If the    CHECK ENGINE    lamp comes on continuously  and or the vehicle is not driving normally  e g   malfunction of the fuel management system or running    out of fuel   serious damage can occur to the emission  system  Please contact your authorized Mercedes Benz  Center immediately     The Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection  SFI  control  module monitors emission control components that  either provide input signals to or receive output signals  from the control module  Malfunctions resulting from  interruptions or 
301. ut motor vehicle safety from the Hotline     J_A208 book Seite 15 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    J_A208 book Seite 16 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    17  Contents     Instruments and controls    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Instruments and controls    Instruments and controls                 18  Center console                               20  Overhead control panel                21    J_A208 book Seite 17 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    18  Instruments and controls    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Instruments and controls    J_A208 book Seite 18 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    19  Instruments and controls    Technical  data    Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    For more detailed descriptions see Index on page 326     For adjustment of air outlets  refer to automatic climate  control  see page 120     1 Side air outlet  adjustable    2 Air volume control for side air outlet    3 Exterior lamp switch  see page 114    4 Parking brake release  see page 204    5 Parking brake pedal  see page 204    6 Hood lock release  see page 254    7 Combination switch  see page 117    8 Cruise control switch  see page 214    9 Multifunction steering wheel  see page 88  Horn  with electronic key in st
302. vehicle is moving     BAS ESP malfunction indicator lamp    The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP  is combined with that of the BAS     The yellow BAS ESP malfunction indicator  lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the  electronic key in steering lock position 2  It should go  out with the engine running     If the BAS ESP malfunction indicator lamp remains  illuminated with the engine running  see page 216 for  notes on the brake assist  BAS  and page 220 for notes  on the electronic stability program  ESP      ABS malfunction indicator lamp    The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the  instrument cluster comes on with the  electronic key in steering lock position 2 and  should go out with the engine running     When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp and the  malfunction message in the instrument cluster remains  illuminated while the engine is running  it indicates  that the ABS has detected a malfunction and has  switched off  In this case  the brake system functions in  the usual manner  but without antilock assistance     With the ABS malfunctioning  the BAS and ESP are also  switched off  Both malfunction indicator lamps and the  ABS malfunction message in the multifunction display  come on with the engine running     If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts  the  malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is  switched off  When the voltage is above this value again   the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  ABS is operational     Hav
303. ving systems    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Notes     The malfunction indicator lamp    for the ESP is  combined with that of the BAS     The yellow BAS ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the  instrument cluster and the yellow ESP warning  lamp v in the speedometer dial come on with the  electronic key in steering lock position 2  They should  go out with the engine running     If the BAS ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on  continuously with the engine running  a malfunction  has been detected in either system  Only partial engine  output will be available     If the BAS malfunctions  the brake system functions in  the usual manner  but without BAS     If the ESP warning message is displayed  have the BAS  or ESP checked at your authorized Mercedes Benz  Center as soon as possible     For ESP warning message  see page 245     With the ABS malfunctioning  the ESP is also switched  off     Driving the vehicle with varied size tires will cause the  wheels to rotate at different speeds  therefore the ESP  may activate  yellow ESP warning lamp in speedometer  dial comes on   For this reason  all wheels  including the  spare wheel  must have the same tire outside diameter     When testing the parking brake on a brake test  dynamometer  the engine must be shut off  Otherwise   the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the  rear wheel brakes     In winter operation  the m
304. was  no voice connection to the Response Center established   then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside  Assistance call  e g  the relevant cellular phone network  is not available   The message    ROADSIDE  ASSISTANCE     CALL FAILED    appears in the  multifunction display     Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the     button on the multifunction steering wheel     Information button       Located below the center armrest cover is the  Information button     Pressing and holding the  button  for longer than 2 seconds  will initiate a call to  the Customer Assistance Center  The button will flash  while the call is in progress  The message    INFO      CONNECTING CALL    will appear in the multifunction  display  When the connection is established  the  message    INFO     CALL CONNECTED    appears in the  multifunction display  The Tele Aid system will transmit  data generating the vehicle identification number   model  color and location  subject to availability of  cellular and GPS signals      A voice connection between the Customer Assistance  Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle  will be established  When a voice connection is  established the audio system mutes and the message     TELE AID     INFO CALL ACTIVE    appears in the  multifunction display  Information regarding the  operation of your vehicle  the nearest Mercedes Benz  Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and services is  available to you     For more details 
305. work and GPS signals  are available and pass the information on to the  response center     Note     Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the  vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite  network and pass the information on to the response  center     Warning     If the indicator lamp in the    SOS    button is  illuminated continuously and there was no voice  connection to the Response Center established   then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an  emergency call  e g  the relevant cellular phone  network is not available   The message     EMERGENCY CALL     CALL FAILED    appears in  the multifunction display for approx  10 seconds     Should this occur  assistance must be summoned  by other means     J_A208 book Seite 184 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    185  Tele Aid    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Initiating an emergency call manually    Briefly press on cover  1      the cover will open     Press the SOS button  2  briefly  The indicator lamp in  the SOS button  2  will flash until the emergency call is  concluded  Wait for a voice connection to the Response  Center     Close the cover  1  after the emergency call is  concluded     P82 95 2114 26    2    1    Warning     If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the  vehicle  e g  smoke or fire in the vehicle  vehicle in  a dangerous road location   please do not wait for  voice contact a
306. y  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Central locking switch    1 Locking    2 Unlocking    The central locking switch is located in the center  console     The doors and trunk can only be locked with the central  locking switch  if both doors are closed     If the vehicle was previously locked with the central  locking switch  while in the selective remote control  mode  only the door opened from the inside is unlocked     If the vehicle was previously locked with the central  locking switch  while in the global remote control mode   the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened  from the inside     Notes     If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote  control  the doors and trunk cannot be unlocked with  the central locking switch     If the vehicle has previously been locked from the  outside  opening a door with the inside door handle will  trigger the alarm  To cancel the alarm  insert the  electronic key in the steering lock or press button     or     on the electronic key     The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with  the central locking switch     Warning     When leaving the vehicle always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  and lock your  vehicle  Do not leave children unattended in the  vehicle  or with access to an unlocked vehicle   Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause  serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 35 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    36  Central locking system    Technical  data  Instr
307. y  permissible  The ride of the vehicle  however  will  become somewhat harder     Tire temperature and pressure increase with the vehicle  speed  Tire pressure should therefore only be checked  and corrected on cold tires  Correct tire pressure in  warm tires only if pressure has dropped below the  pressure listed in the table and the respective operating  conditions are taken into consideration     An underinflated tire due to a slow leak  e g  due to a  nail in the tire  may cause damage such as tread  separation  bulging etc   Regular tire pressure checks   including the spare tire  at intervals of no more than  14 days are therefore essential     J_A208 book Seite 271 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    272  Battery    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    If a tire constantly loses air  it should be inspected for  damage     The spare tire should be checked periodically for  condition and inflation  Spare tire will age and become  worn over time even if never used  and thus should be  inspected and replaced when necessary     Battery    Important     Battery replacement information     The maintenance free battery is located in the trunk  under the trunk floor     The service life of the battery is dependent on its  condition of charge  The battery should always be kept  sufficiently charged  in order to last an optimum length  of time     Warning     Do not overinflate tires  Ove
308. y moving  parts while a seat is being adjusted     Warning     When leaving the vehicle always remove the  electronic key from the steering lock  and lock your  vehicle     The power seats can also be operated with the  driver   s or passenger door open  Do not leave  children unattended in the vehicle or with access  to an unlocked vehicle  Unsupervised use of vehicle  equipment may cause serious personal injury     J_A208 book Seite 45 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    46  Seats    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    The slide switches are located in each door     We recommend to adjust the power seat in the following  order     1 Seat  up down  Press the switch  up down direction  until  comfortable seating position with still sufficient  headroom is reached     2 Seat  fore aft  Press the switch  fore aft direction  until a  comfortable seating position is reached that still  allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal    safely  The position should be as far rearward as  possible  consistent with ability to properly operate  controls     Note     Do not move the front passenger seat completely  forward if objects are stored in the parcel net in the  front passenger side footwell  Items in the net may  be damaged     3 Seat cushion tilt  Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until  your legs are lightly supported     4 Backrest tilt  Press the switch in the directio
309. y program   ESP                                             220  What you should know  at the gas station                        224  Check regularly and  before a long trip                       226    J_A208 book Seite 177 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    178  Control and operation of radio transmitters    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Control and operation of radio transmitters    COMAND  radio and telephone    1  Observe all legal requirements     Telephones and two way radio    Radio transmitters  such as a portable telephone or a  citizens band unit should only be used inside the  vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is  installed on the outside of the vehicle     Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions  regarding use of an external antenna     Warning     Please do not forget that your primary  responsibility is to drive the vehicle  Only operate  the COMAND  Cockpit Management and Data  System   radio or telephone1 if road and traffic  conditions permit     Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph   approximately 50 km h   your vehicle is covering  a distance of approximately 50 feet  approximately  14 m  every second     Warning     Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a  built in or attached antenna  i e  without being  connected to an external antenna  from inside the  vehicle while the engine is running  Doing so could  lead 
310. ys can prematurely  deteriorate the soft top material     The soft top may become moldy and receive permanent  creases if it is kept in the storage compartment for an  extended period     Therefore  we recommend raising and airing it  thoroughly with the side windows open  do not expose  it to the sun  at regular intervals during the wet and  cold seasons     To prevent damage  the soft top must be dry and clean  before lowering it into the storage compartment  There  is the possibility of sharp edged dirt particles damaging  the soft top or scratching the rear window     J_A208 book Seite 169 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    170  Wind screen    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Wind screen  optional     The wind screen is most effective when all four side  windows are fully raised     Installation    1  Remove wind screen from its storage bag  located in  the trunk  secured with hook and loop fasteners   and unfold     2  Pull folded end sections in direction of arrow  1  and  unfold in direction of arrow  2      P65 00 2016 26    1    2    J_A208 book Seite 170 Donnerstag  31  Mai 2001 9 35 09    171  Wind screen    Technical  data  Instruments  and controls  Operation  Driving  Instrument  cluster display  Practical hints  Car care  Index    Important     The open end of the hooks must point toward the  vehicle   s front     3  Insert end section in right opening  3  on quarte
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
CD445 www.philips.com/support EN Digital Cordless Telephone  取扱説明書  SikaTop Seal 107 CA  Sony ICF-SC1 User's Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file